HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 09-00350 - Hemming Deseret Book ShellProject Manual and Specifications for:
Hemming Retail Shell #1
Bid Set
100% Building Bid Documents
September 11, 2009
Method Studio Project #: 09.0340
Prepared by:
'q c-- i`6""j l__.iSTUDI❑INC.
242 SOUTH 400 EAST, SUITE B
SALT LAKE CITY, UTAH 841 1 1
Rexburg, Idaho
lqt�wtim. `'ru�r
d� _ tt�-3
Project Manual — Table of Contents
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Title Page
Project Manual Table of Contents
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100
Summary
01250
Contract Modification Procedures
01290
Payment Procedures
01310
Project Management and Coordination
01320
Construction Progress Documentation
01330
Submittal Procedures
01400
Quality Requirements
01420
References
01500
Temporary Facilities and Controls
01731
Cutting and Patching
01770
Contract Closeout Procedures
01781
Project Record Documents
01782
Operation and Maintenance Data
DIVISION 2 — SITE CONSTRUCTION
02810 Irrigation
02910 Planting
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 — MASONRY
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies
DIVISION 5 — METALS
05120 Structural Steel
05500 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 — WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry
06160 Sheathing
06201 Exterior Finish Carpentry
DIVISION 7 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 Bituminous Dampproofing
07190 Water Repellents
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Table of Contents
MS #:09.0340 100% Bid Documents -1
07210
Building Insulation
07410
Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
07411
Metal Roof Panels
07620
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07712
Gutters & Downspouts
07920
Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8— DOORS AND WINDOWS
08113 HM and Frames
08411 Aluminum Storefronts
08710 Door Hardware
DIVISION 9 — FINISHES
09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies
09912 Painting
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Table of Contents
MS #:09.0340 100% Bid Documents -2
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY
PART1-GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
2. Type of the Contract.
3. Work under other contracts.
4. Owner -furnished products.
5. Use of premises.
6. Owner's occupancy requirements.
7. Work restrictions.
8. Specification formats and conventions.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division I Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for division of responsibilities for
the Work.
2. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Hemming Retail Shell #1
1. Project Location:
B. Owner:
100 South 200 West
Rexburg, ID
Hemming Corporation
Rexburg, ID
Owner's Representative: Richie Webb 208-360-2619
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUMMARY
MS #, WOO Section 01100- 1
C. Architect
Method Studio, Inc.
242 South 400 East, suite B
Salt Lake City, UT 84111
Contact: Joe Smith
801.532.4422 (office)
801.598.2310 (cell)
D. The Work consists of the following:
1. The build -out is approximately 9,132 square feet and is to be built in the existing shelled
space located in the southwest corner of The Village development.
1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT
A. Project will be constricted under a single prime contract.
1.5 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the
Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.6 OWNER -FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Owner will furnish products as indicated in the drawings. The Work includes providing support
systems to receive Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical
connections.
1. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner -furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be
present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
3. If Owner -furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
4. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
5. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner -furnished
products. Using Owner -furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner -furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner -furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
7. If Owner -furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
Hemming Hetail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 SUMMARY
Section 01100- 2
1.7 USE OF PREMISES
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas, loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, other building
occupants, guests, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for
parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. On -Site Work Hours: TBD.
1. Weekend Hours: TBD
2. Early Morning Hours: TBD
3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: TBD
4. Hours for Core Drilling and other noisy activities: TBD
B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect, on site Building Manager, and Owner not less than three days in
advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect, on site Building Manager,
and Owner written permission.
C. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
1.9 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16 -division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-
referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUMMARY
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01100- 3
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are
not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUMMARY
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01100- 4
SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Architect's Supplemental
Instructions."
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
C. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor -Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PORCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01250-1
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests or forms as approved
by Architect and Owner.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or on Architect's standard change order
form.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01250
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PORCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01250- 2
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost -loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy
requirements for the Schedule of Values.
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets,
Submittals Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of Architect.
C. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
7. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
Remming Retail Shell #1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01290- 1
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work -in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 5th of
the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the
last day of the month.
D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01290- 2
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of Values.
3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Schedule of unit prices.
5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
8. Copies of building permits.
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
10. Initial progress report.
11. Report of preconstruction conference.
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document 6707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01290- 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01290
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01290- 4
SECTION 01310 -PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Project meetings.
3. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for a description of the division of
Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section.
C. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
I. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01310-1
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
Content: Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40
inches (750 by 1000 mm).
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return
one copy.
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01310- 2
I . Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 5 days of
the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstmction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 2 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items.
C. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for RFIs.
I. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Preparation of Record Documents.
k. Use of the premises and existing building.
1. Work restrictions.
M. Owner's occupancy requirements.
n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
o. Construction waste management and recycling.
P. Parking availability.
q. Office, work, and storage areas.
r. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
S. First aid.
t. Security.
U. Progress cleaning.
V. Working hours.
3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01310- 3
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C. Related RFIs.
d. Related Change Orders.
C. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility problems.
k. Time schedules.
I. Weather limitations.
M. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Testing and inspecting requirements.
U. Installation procedures.
V. Coordination with other work.
W. Required performance results.
X. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
Hemming Hetail shell #1 PROJECT MANAGEMENTAND COORDINATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01310- 4
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Status of submittals.
4) Deliveries.
5) Off-site fabrication.
6) Access.
7) Site utilization.
8) Temporary facilities and controls.
9) Work hours.
10) Hazards and risks.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.6 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor
will be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01310- 5
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and
the following:
I. Project name.
2. Date.
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. Hard -Copy RFIs:
Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
L The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
C. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
I. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 1 Section "Contract Modifications."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected patties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Section 01310- 6
I . Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 0 13 10
Hemming Retail Shell #1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01310- 7
SECTION 01320 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submittals Schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Field condition reports.
B. See Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for preparing a combined Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
C. See Division I Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
D. See Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
I. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01320-1
F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.
2. Specification Section number and title.
3. Submittal category (action or informational).
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval
B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire
network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of initial schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
I. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD -R, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated)
and date on label.
D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start
date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals.
F. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
Hemming Retail Shell#1
MS #: 09.0340 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Section 01320- 2
I. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction
Schedule.
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of
Substantial and Final Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities j
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, I
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. I
I
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. - - --
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 5 days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for f
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
MS 4 09.0340 Section 01320- 3
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
C. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use of premises restrictions.
f. Provisions for future construction.
g. Seasonal variations.
h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)
A. Gantt -Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt -chart -type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.
Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback
was received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require 2 months or longer to complete, indicate an
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
2.4 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.
2. Equipment at Project site.
3. Material deliveries.
4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
5. Accidents.
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
7. Meter readings and similar recordings.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
MS 9: 09.0340 Section 01320- 4
8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
9. Services connected and disconnected.
10. Equipment or system tests and startups.
B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation[ on CSI Form 13.2A]. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,
together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-monthly intervals, update schedule to
reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each
regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know
schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01320
Hemming Retail Shell #i CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
MS #: 09.0340
Section 01320- 5
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C. See Division I Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and
for mockup requirements.
D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
F. See Division I Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
G. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
I . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01330- 1
B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
06100.01.A).
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
1. Other necessary identification.
E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will[ not] be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS # 09.0340 Section 01330- 2
G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,
without review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810, CSI Form 12.1A or similar.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked approved.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approved taken by
Architect.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1. Contractor must agree to and sign electronic release agreement.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
e. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring.
f. Printed performance curves.
g. Operational range diagrams.
h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01330- 3
i. Testing by recognized testing agency.
4. Number of Copies: Submit 5 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
C. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
g. Templates and patterns.
h. Schedules.
i. Notation of coordination requirements.
j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
1. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
M. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by I I inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by
40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).
3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will
return one copy.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
C. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01330- 4
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit four full set(s) of available choices where color,
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit four sets of Samples. Architect will retain two
Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample
set as a Project Record Sample.
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division I Section "Payment
Procedures."
I. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design.
Number of Copies: Submit four copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01330- 5
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division l Section "Project
Management and Coordination."
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project.
M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01330- 6
N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer.
S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for
resubmittal.
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01330- 7
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit four copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 01330
Hemming Retail Shell #1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01330- 8
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality -
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01400-1
F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
G. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
Hemming Retail Shell #1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01400- 2
I. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient If
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01400- 3
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities
having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality -control services.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01400- 4
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service
representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division I Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality -control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
L Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01400- 5
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified [testing agency] [special inspector] as
required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and
as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality -control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division I Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality -control services.
END OF SECTION 01400
Hemming Retail Shell #1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01400- 6
SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
Hemming Retail shell #1 REFERENCES
MS M 09.0340 Section 01420- 1
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
PRIVATE tbll
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The)
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The)
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
ACI
ACI International (American Concrete Institute)
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
AGA
American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The)
AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
At Asphalt Institute
Hemming Retail shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 REFERENCES
Section 01420- 2
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
I
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
i
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America
(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
r
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.
APA
Architectural Precast Association
i
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
APA EWS
APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems
API
American Petroleum Institute
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
ASCE/SEI
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASME
ASME International i
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
I
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering j
1
ASTM
I
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
AWCI
i
AWCI International j
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International)
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340
Section 01420- 3
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #:09.0340 Section 01420- 4
(Now WCSC)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
AWPA
American Wood -Preservers' Association
AWS
American Welding Society
AWWA
American Water Works Association
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
BICSI
BICSI
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International)
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
CDA
Copper Development Association
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
CPA
Composite Panel Association
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association
CRI
Carpet & Rug Institute (The)
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #:09.0340 Section 01420- 4
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
CSI
Cast Stone Institute
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
CSSB
i
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau I
I
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
DHI
I
Door and Hardware Institute
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
I
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
ESD
ESD Association
FIBA
Federation Internationale de Basketball I
(The International Basketball Federation) i
FNB
Federation Internationale de Volleyball
(The International Volleyball Federation)
i
FM Approvals
FM Approvals i
FM Global
FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
FMRC
`I
Factory Mutual Research
(Now FM Global)
I
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.
1
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association
i
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
GA
I
Gypsum Association
GANA
Glass Association of North America
GRI
(Now GSI)
GS
Green Seal
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340
Section 01420- 5
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
HI
Hydraulic Institute
i
HI
Hydronics Institute
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
IAS
International Approval Services
(Now CSA International)
IBF
Intemational Badminton Federation
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
ICRI
Intemational Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
j
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council c
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
i
ISO
International Organization for Standardization j
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association l
ITS
Intertek Testing Service NA
ITU
I
International Telecommunication Union
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
i
LPI
i
Lightning Protection Institute
Hemming Retail
Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS ti: 09.0340
Section 01420- 6
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America
MIA Marble Institute of America
MPI Master Painters Institute
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE
NACE International
NCMA
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
NCAA
National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
NFHS
National Federation of State High School Associations
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01420- 7
NFPA
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
NGA
National Glass Association
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)
NTRMA
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association
(Now TRI)
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association
(Now WDMA)
OPL
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.
(Now ITS)
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
PDCA
Painting & Decorating Contractors of America
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
PLANET
Professional Landcare Network
(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America)
PTI
Post -Tensioning Institute
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01420- 8
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service
t
SAE
SAE International
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
SDI
Steel Door Institute
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
SEVASCE
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers
(See ASCE)
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council
SIA
Security Industry Association
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(Now IGMA)
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray
Polyurethane Foam Division)
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
STI
i
Steel Tank Institute
SWI
Steel Window Institute
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc.
TLA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance
TMS
The Masonry Society
Hemming Retail Shell
#1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340
Section 01420- 9
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
TPI Turfgrass Producers International
TRI Tile Roofing Institute
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
USAV
USA Volleyball
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCSC)
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council i
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association)
i
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association I
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association)
i
W1 Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California)
I
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)
f
I
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association
i
WWPA Western Wood Products Association t
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
PRIVATE tbl2
BOCA BOCA International, Inc.
(See ICC)
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
i
ICBO International Conference of Building Officials
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340
Section 01420- 10
(See ICC)
ICBG ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.
(See ICC -ES)
ICC International Code Council
ICC -ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.
(See ICC)
UBC Uniform Building Code
(See ICC)
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.
PRIVATE tbl3
CE Army Corps of Engineers
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission
DOC Department of Commerce
DOD Department of Defense
DOE Department of Energy
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDA Food and Drug Administration
GSA General Services Administration
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
PBS Public Building Service
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01420- 11
(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science
RUS Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
SD State Department
TRB Transportation Research Board
USDA Department of Agriculture
USPS Postal Service
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list.
PRIVATE tbl4
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus
(See FS)
FED -STD Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS Federal Specification
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL -STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list.
PRIVATE tb15
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES
MS #: 09.0340
Section 01420- 12
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and
Thermal Insulation
CCR California Code of Regulations
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission
TFS Texas Forest Service
Forest Resource Development
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01420
Hemming Retail Shell #1 REFERENCES _
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01420-13
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements
for products in those Sections.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
1.3 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering
and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as
required for construction operations.
C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use
without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of
services as required for construction operations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70,
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01500- 1
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
B. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by
maximum available lengths; regular -type panels with tapered edges. Comply with
ASTM C 36/C 36M.
C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral -fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of [8] <Insert number> at
each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Section 01500- 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
0
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify faciliti
Work. es as required by progress of the
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.
1. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for
construction.
D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
I. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
F. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MS #: 09
Section 01500- 3
G. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as j
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
i
I. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. j
J. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire
departments, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Owner's office, Principal
subcontractors' field and home offices.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
L. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail in field office.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
3. Provide dust -control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment
as required to minimize dust.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01500- 4
L Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
H. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide
shoes, and similar items of limited life.
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become
damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make
required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01500- 5
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
B. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from
heavy rains.
C. Pest Control: Engage pest -control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
E. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor -to -ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire -retardant plywood on construction operations side.
2. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3 -mil (0.07 -mm) polyethylene sheet on
each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3 -mil (0.07 -mm) polyethylene sheet, extending
sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints.
Cover floor with fire -retardant plywood.
a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with
not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water -dampened foot
mats in vestibule.
3. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
5. Protect air -handling equipment.
6. Weather strip openings.
7. Provide walk -off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire -protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
I. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure & construction areas.
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire -prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01500- 6
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire -protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01500
Hemming Retail Shell #1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01500- 7
SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
C. See Division 7 Section "Through -Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire -rated
construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 7 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long
services/systems will be disrupted.
6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 CUTTING AND PATCHING
Section 01731- 1
C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their
capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased
operational life or safety.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch constniction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01731- 2
B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete & Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond -core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations _
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
I. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01731- 3
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 01731
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CUTTING AND PATCHING
MS M 09.0340 Section 01731- 4
SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
C. See Division 1 Section 'Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
D. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
E. See Division I Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
F. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, and
similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01770- 1
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
I. Reinspection: Request reinspection
incomplete is completed or corrected
2. Results of completed inspection
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
when the Work identified in previous inspections as
will form the basis of requirements for Final
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Submit pest -control final inspection report and warranty.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01770- 2
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1/2 -by -Il -inch
(215 -by -280 -mm) paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
Hemming Retali Shell #1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
MS g: 09.0340 Section 01770- 3
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision -obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
1. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
M. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment[, elevator equipment,] and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Hemming Retail shell #1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
MS M 09.0340 Section 01770- 4
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01770
Hemming Retail Shell #1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01770- 5
SECTION 01781 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of
the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked -up Record Prints.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked -up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Hemming Retail Shell #t PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
MS #: 09.0340 Section 0 1781 - 1
2.2
2.3
2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Identification: As follows:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
C. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
2.
3.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications,
applicable.
to Project site and changes in
and Record Drawings where
Hemming Retail Shell m
MS #: 09.0340 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 01781- 2
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01781
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 01781- 3
SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Emergency manuals.
2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,
systems and equipment.
B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manual: Submit three copies of each manual in final form at least 7 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 7 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
MS #: 09.0340 Section 01782- 1
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
I. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8 -1/2 -by -11 -inch (215 -by -280 -mm) paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside
covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple -volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy -paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency
instructions, and emergency procedures.
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for
[fire] [flood] [gas leak] [water leak] [power failure] [water outage] [equipment failure] [and]
[chemical release or spill].
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type
of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
MS N. 09.0340 Section 01782- 2
2.3 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating
procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
6. Limiting conditions.
7. Performance curves.
8. Engineering data and tests.
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal
shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and
required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color -coding where required for
identification.
2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection
procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and
maintenance, and repair instructions.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Section 01782- 3
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of
parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of
equipment:
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,
disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training videotape if
available, that detail essential maintenance procedures:
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Section 01782- 4
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
F. Comply with Division I Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01782
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #: 09.0340 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Section 01782- 5
SECTION 02810
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
PART GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Provisions established within the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General
Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.
B. Section 02910 — Landscaping.
C. Local governing authority and code requirements.
D. Construction Drawings.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Installation of underground, automatically controlled lawn and shrub bed irrigation system, complete, including
electrical connections, connections to water mains, and necessary accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Following installation, make final adjustments of lawn irrigation system prior to Owner's Representative's final
inspection.
1. Flush system completely to remove debris, with nozzles removed.
2. Verify sprinkler operation and alignment for direction of throw.
3. Check pop-up spray nozzling for proper arc of spray.
4. Determine whether uninform distribution exists over all areas.
B. Following final adjustment, operate the entire installation to demonstration the complete and successful operation of
equipment.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition
1. D 2239 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled 1. D.
2. D 2241 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR -Series)
3. D 2609 Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe
4. D 1784 Plastic Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals:
1. Required for items specified herein. Provide 2 copies of each to Owner for review.
2. Do not proceed with purchase or installation of materials prior to receipt of approved submittals from Owner.
3. Prior to installation of any work, prepare a detailed list of all materials proposed for use in this project and
submit to Owner for approval. Prepare typewritten material list using the following format.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-1
Item No.Descrintion Manufacturer Model
1. Mainline ABC, Inc. CL -200 PVC
2. Spray head XYZ Co. 506B
3. Etc. Etc. Etc.
B. Substitutions shall be made only with the written approval of the Owner. Substitutions will not be considered prior
to opening of bids.
1. Substitution of a specified irrigation head after awarding the bid shall require piping diagram noting revised
pipe sizes, pressure loss calculations, and head locations necessary to achieve the desired watering provided
by system as shown on construction drawings.
2. Provide 5 copies each of product data for requested substitutions to owner for review.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS
A. General: Furnish the following instructions and maintenance data as required herein. Final Acceptance will not be
made until items have been reviewed and approved by Owner.
B. As -built Drawings: 2 sets, noting exact locations of elements and changes to Construction Drawings.
C. Operation Manual: 2 copies, bound in 1 inch diameter three ring binders, indexed and tabbed for easy reference,
and labeled on spine and cover. Manual to include:
1. Approved submittals as specified herein.
2. Installation instructions, including mounting details for control valves.
3. Operating Instructions:
a. Winterization procedures.
b. Recommended operation sequence, frequency, and length of operation cycle, as per relationship to
estimated absorption rate, evaporation rate and anticipated flow.
4. Maintenance Instructions:
a. Items requiring manufacturer's product data, installation, and maintenance instructions.
b. Complete warranty information, complete and mail to manufacturer, and provide copies to Owner.
D. Controller Chart: Prepare a color coded chart, reduced in size, containing the same plan information as the As -Built
drawings, and laminated in plastic (both sides), with the following specific information:
I. Note routing of control wires,
2. Identify valves as to size, station number (on controller), and type of irrigation head on each valve.
3. Delineate each station's limits of coverage by color coding, with each station having a different color noting
it's areas of coverage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. If irrigation work is part of General Construction Contract, the meter shall be provided by the Plumbing
Subcontractor in accordance with Section 02660.
B. If irrigation work is not part of General Construction Contract, General Contractor shall contract with and pay the
local utility company, including meter deposit, to tap water main and install meter(s) required.
C. Visit site and become familiar with nature and location of work, existing conditions and conditions that will exist
during installation.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Minimum of five consecutive years experience in this area of work and having installed other jobs of similar size
and scope.
B. Contractor to provide a minimum of three references and a list of similar projects with the owners names, addresses,
and telephone numbers, when requested by Owner.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-2
A. Once each month, for first year of operation following Final Acceptance, provide on-site consultation with Owner's
operating personnel. This shall include up to 4 hours time per month.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials shall be new and without flaws or defects, and of quality and performance as specified. Overages at
completion are property of the Contractor, to be removed from the site.
B. Materials and equipment specified by "Proprietary Specification" as manufactured by a particular company, etc.,
shall be used, unless substitutions are approved according to Section 1.05.
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Piping:
1. Main line to be CL -200 polyvinyl chloride pipe or as indicated on drawings.
a. Pipe up to and including 2-1/2 inches in diameter shall have bell and socketjoints.
b. Pipe greater than 3 inches in diameter shall have snap connections with rubber gasketjoints. Thrust
blocks as described in Section 02660 shall be required in conjunction with rubber gasket joint pipe.
2. Lateral lines to be #80 NSF polyethylene pipe or as indicated on drawings. In climates where draining the
system is not necessary, use CL -200 PVC pipe.
3. Polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D2239, with a
hydrostatic design stress of 630 PSI and designated as PE 2306.
B. Sleeves: Minimum diameter of 2 times larger than the pipe or pipe(s) scheduled to pass through them. Sleeves shall
be a minimum of 2 inch diameter and shall be CL -200 PVC pipe.
C. Plastic Fittings:
1. Utilized throughout the system (mains and laterals) in wann climates and main lines only in freezing climates:
Standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC Comply with ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell
classification 12454-B.
a. Threads, where required, injection molded type.
b. Tees and ells: side gated.
2. Threaded nipples: ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads.
3. Joint cement.
a. Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings and per ASTM specification D 2564-67.
4. Joint primer.
a. Type as recommended by manufacturer of pipe and fittings
5. Utilized for laterals of flexible polyethylene pipe, Type I PVC insert fittings designed for use with this type of
pipe conforming to ASTM D2609.
a. Fittings: Manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2609, PVC Type 1, cell classification 12454-B.
b. Pipe and fittings shall be joined with stainless steel lockine pinch clamps or all stainless steel
screw clamps
D. Swing Joint connections between heads and laterals:
1. Pop-up spray heads with 1/2 -inch IPS connection:
a. Thick wall, flexible, polyethylene pipe, with fittings that have male barbs on one end and either male or
female screw ends opposite (glue fittings and female barb adapters not allowed). Pipe and fittings shall
be Hardie Dura-Pol Blue Stripe tubing with spiral barb fittings or approved equal
2. Rotor heads with 3/4 -inch IPS connection:
a. Pre -manufactured schedule 40 swing joints as manufactured by Lasco or Speers.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-3
b. If rotor head flow rate is 4.0 gpm or less, use the flex pipe indicated for 1/2 -inch pop-up spray heads.
2.3 VALVES
A. Manual valves:
1. Resilient seat gate valves for use as cut off or isolation valve on lines up to 2 inches in diameter shall be as
manufactured by Nibco, or approved equal.
2. Mechanical joint valve for use as cut off or isolation valve on lines greater than 2 inches shall be of cast iron
and bronze construction and have a fusion bonded epoxy coated (exterior and interior) finish as the Resilient
Wedge Valve, manufactured by the Clow Valve Co., Oskaloosa, Iowa, or approved equal.
2.4 QUICK COUPLER VALVES
A. Each with Key having 3/4 inch male top pipe threads for hose connection, shall be:
I. Rain Bird model 3RC Valve with model 33K Key, or approved equal.
2.5 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Rain Bird PEB Series electric remote control valves.
B. Provide water -tight connectors as Scotch Lock connectors with sealant for wiring connections at electric valves.
2.6 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Full or Part Circle Pop -tip Fixed Spray Sprinkler:
1. Pop-up heights:
a. Turf - 4 inches
b. Shrub and Groundcover Beds - 12 inches
2. Acceptable Products shall include:
a. Rain Bird 1800 Series nozzles with 1800 Series sprinklers having Pressure Regulating (PRS) and Seal -
A -Matic (SAM) features.
b. Full or Part Circle Pop-up Gear Driven Rotor Sprinkler shall be Rainbird series with check valve, or as
otherwise indicated on the Irrigation Plans.
2.7 VALVE BOX
A. Valve boxes shall be as manufactured by Ametek, or an approved equal.
2.8 MANUAL DRAINS (Freezing climates)
A. Buckner 22001, or approved equal.
2.9 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER
A. Controller shall have a wall mount weatherproof lockable cabinet with internal transformer and shall be as indicated
on the drawings.
2.10 CONTROL WIRE
A. Number 14 size (minimum) copper wire, U. L. approved for underground direct burial.
1. Colored wire shall have color coding as shown on the controller.
2. Provide a single wire from the controller to each valve.
3. Provide a common neutral from the controller to each valve.
2.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Comply with the requirements and codes of the local governing authority regarding backflow prevention.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-4
B. Provide the necessary materials, insulation/draining capabilities, and acceptable concealment to satisfy the
requirements and codes of the local authority and aesthetic needs of Owner. Concealment techniques may range
from painting of exposed piping to providing a plant material screen, or providing a painted metal enclosure around
unit.
C. Backflow Preventers shall be a type suitable for use in a high hazard cross connection to a potable water system as
manufactured by Febco Sales Inc., Fresno, CA., or approved equal:
1. Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be Febco No. 825YA series Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow
Preventer, or approved equal.
2.12 RAINFALL SENSOR
A. Provide a rainfall sensor to cancel the operation of the controller during substantial rainfall. Sensor shall be the
Mini-Clik manufactured by Glen Hilton Products, or approved equal.
2.13 METER
A. With meter box, shall meet or exceed the requirements set forth by the local water utility.
2.14 SUBSURFACE DRIP SYSTEMS
A. Drip tubing shall be Netafim Techline series with integral and evenly spaced pressure compensating drippers at
specified intervals in two discharge rates (0.61 & 0.92) in gallons per hour (GPH). Fittings shall be Netafim
Techline molded plastic fittings with 0.57 -inch outside diameter.
B. All systems shall be equipped with a Netafim pressure reducing valve and a line strainer on the upstream side of the
electric control valve. Strainer shall have a 100 PSI pressure rating, 140 mesh screen, a 1/2" outlet for flushing, and
shall be installed in a plastic valve box.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Pressure/Flow Test: conduct tests at the beginning tap or meter and provide written results to Owner for the
following information:
1. Static pressure in psi
2. Residual pressure in psi
3. Flow in gpm
B. Layout of sprinkler heads: Stake locations of each sprinkler in accordance with the Construction Drawings. If
discrepancies in drawings become apparent, notify Owner of discrepancies.
C. Prior to installation, receive approval from Owner to proceed with constriction along with proposed revisions
required due to test results or discrepancies on Construction Drawings.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate trench to proper depth.
B. Minimum trench width shall be 3-1/2- in.
C. Backfill and hand tamp over -excavation prior to installing piping.
D. Excavate trenches deeper than required in soils containing rock or other hard material that might damage pipe.
Backfill to pipe grade with selected fine earth or sand.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-5
E. Keep trenches free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe.
F. Compact trench backfill to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil. Restore to adjacent grade, free of dips,
depressions, humps, or other irregularities.
1. Where acceptable soil exists, the owner's representative may authorize flooding in lieu of tamping.
2. Compaction by truck or other vehicle is not permitted.
G. Avoid heating trenches, electric ducts, storm and sanitary sewer lines, water and gas mains when trenching for
piping.
H. Do not cut walks, drives, or curb and gutter when trenching for piping.
1. Provide sleeves under paving prior to installation of paving.
2. Under existing paving, auger bore or tunnel.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM
A. Minimum cover:
1. Lawn and planting areas:
a. Mains - minimum 18 inches below finish grade.
b. Laterals and Control Valves - minimum 12 inches below finish grade.
2. Roadways or parking areas: minimum 24 inches below finish grade.
B. Clearances: Minimum of 3 -inches between parallel lines in the same trench or vertical clearance between lines
crossing at angles.
C. Special Requirements - PVC and PE pipe:
1. Snake in trench at least I foot per 100 feet of pipe to allow for thermal expansion.
2. Mainline pipe to drain to low point drains located at low points of the mainline.
3.4 SLEEVING
A. Provide sleeves for both piping and control wiring where each passes under paved surfaces:
1. Depths of sleeves shall be the same as that required for piping per location/ condition.
2. Extend sleeves 12 inches beyond paving at each end.
3. Install permanent benchmark at top of curbs for reference to sleeve locations.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Do not lay pipe on unstable material or blocking, or when in the opinion of Owner conditions are unsuitable.
B. Rest fill length of pipe section on bed of trench, excavating recesses to accommodate joints.
C. Hold pipe securely while joints are being made.
D. Threaded Plastic Pipe:
1. Do not use solvent cement on threadedjoints.
2. Wrap joints with Teflon tape or utilize virgin Teflon lubricant.
3. When threaded pipe is used, material shall be Schedule 80 PVC.
E. Cemented joints for PVC bell end pipe and PVC pipe with socket fittings: ASTM D 2855-70.
3.6 VALVES
A. Do not locate beneath paved surfaces.
B. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch.
C. Locate within valve box with 6 -inch deep layer of coarse gravel beneath bottom of valve.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-6
1. Top of quick coupler valves shall be as close to the top of the valve box as possible. Top of gravel layer shall
be 3 inches below top of valve.
D. Master Valve:
1. Locate immediately behind backflow preventer.
2. Valve shall be energized by the master valve circuit on the automatic controller.
3.7 SPRINKLERS
A. Install plumb to within 1/16 -inch, with top collar (not nozzle) flush with finish grade.
B. Provide Swing Joint for each Sprinkler.
C. Heads adjacent to paving and curbs: Locate between 2 and 4 inches from edge of paving or back of curb.
3.8 SUBSURFACE DRIP
A. Do not install drip tubing until 5 gallon and larger plant materials are in place, and finish grade is established.
B. Protection:
1. Tape all open ends of drip tubing during installation to prevent entry of debris into system.
2. Cut all drip tubing with pliers -type Victor pipe cutter to prevent entry of debris into the system. Do not use
saw.
C. Drip tubing to have 3" of soil cover in planting beds.
D. Provide flush valve and air relief valve assembly as indicated on drawings.
3.9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS / CONTROL WIRE
A. Shall be in strict accordance with the latest edition of National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.
B. Provide the electrical connection to the system as designated on the Construction Drawings and as specified herein.
C. General:
1. Do not run control wiring and power supply wiring in the same conduit.
2. Provide continuous runs of wire between the controller and valves. Splices shall be made with one of the
following:
a. Watertight below ground electrical junction boxes.
b. Watertight connectors, such as utilized for valves, and located within valve box for ease of locating.
3. Bury control wire beside pipe in same trench and bundle and tape together at not more than 10 foot intervals.
D. Expansion Loops: Constructed by wrapping wire around a 1/2 inch diameter pipe to create a coil. A 3 foot section
of wire shall be used to create a 12 inch coil, and a 6 foot section is required to create a 24 inch coil.
1. Provide 12 inch expansion loops at each wire splice (not including valves) and at each change of wire
direction.
2. Provide 24 inch expansion loops at each control valve and where each valve enters the conduit for the
automatic controller.
3.10 BACKFILL
A. Sand or fine grained soils should be used for cover to a sufficient depth to prevent damage to the pipe from rocks or
other debris in backfill during the compacting operation.
B. Fill trench to within 3 in. of top with excavated soil and compact.
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-7
C. Fill top 3 in. with existing topsoil in planting or turf areas and wheel roll until compaction of backfill is same as
surrounding soil.
D. Grade backfilled trench uniform with surrounding grades.
3.11 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Comply with local codes for the installation of the backflow preventer. In the absence of local codes, minimum
requirements shall be to set in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide a combination of drains and quick coupler valves to accommodate winterization of the entire system by
forced air. Submit materials/ methods to Owner for consideration and receive approval prior to installation of work.
3.12 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER
A. Location and installation shall be as per drawings, and approved by Owner prior to installation.
B. Provide separate, rigid conduits for both power supply and control wiring.
1. Control wire conduit shall extend to 24 inches below grade.
2. Secure conduit to wall in a manner acceptable to Owner.
C. Provide electrical grounding for controller in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Contractor shall provide an on-site walk through of the system and fully describe its operation with Owner.
B. Contractor shall achieve final acceptance when:
I. Systems are fully operational, and
2. Approved by Owner, and
3. As -built drawings and project manuals have been accepted and approved.
END OF SECTION
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
02810-8
SECTION 02910
PLANTING
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Trees, shrubs, perennials, vines, and groundcover requirements.
2. Bedding, topsoil, and temporary support.
B. The work to be performed under this section shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor, and
plants necessary for the proper planting or all trees, shrubs, perennials, vines, and groundcovers of
the kind and sizes specified at the prescribed locations, and otherwise in accordance with the
drawings and specifications or as directed by the Landscape Architect.
C. Related sections:
1. Section 02810 Underground Irrigation Systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ANN: American Associations of Nurserymen, Inc.
B. ANSI Z60.1: American Standard for Nursery Stock.
C. FS O -F-241: Fertilizers, Mixed Commercial.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in conformity with applicable requirements of AAN.
B. Obtain nursery stock and other plant materials form approved sources prior to order and delivery.
C. Provide plants that are declared free of disease and insect pests.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Exercise care in digging, transporting, handling, and packing of all plants.
B. Handle plants so roots are protected at all times. If delivery is in open vehicles, cover entire load
without causing over heating.
C. Deliver plant material immediately prior to placement. Keep plant material moist.
D. Protect root balls from sun and wind by covering with soil or other suitable material if not planted
immediately on delivery.
E. Store fertilizer in a weatherproof location such that its effectiveness will not be impaired.
1.05 ACCEPTANCE
A. Plants shall be accepted if the ball of earth surrounding roots (rootball) has not been cracked or
broken.
B. Plants shall be accepted if burlap, staves, and ropes required in connection with transplanting are
installed and still intact upon delivery.
C. Heeled in stock from cold storage shall not be accepted.
1.06 SAMPLES
A. Samples of the materials listed below shall be submitted to the City Project Manager and Landscape
Architect for inspection and approval prior to the beginning of work under this contract.
B. Delivery of materials may begin only after samples have been approved. All materials furnished for
the work shall confonn in every respect to the approved samples. Any non -conforming materials
will be rejected.
Section 02910 Planting - - --
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The planting plan is diagrammatic, and all plant locations are approximate. Plant symbols take
precedence over plant quantities shown on the plans and in the plant material schedule. The
Contractor shall verify all plant quantities and notify the and Landscape Architect of any
discrepancies between the quantities and the symbols shown.
B. Provide plants of normal growth and uniform height, according to species, with straight canes and
well developed leaders, roots, and tops.
C. Provide plants of sizes indicated. The size stated in each case shall be interpreted to mean
dimensions of plant as it stands in its mature position in the nursery without straightening of any
branches or leaders.
D. Provide legible labels attached to all plants, specimens, bundles, boxes, bales, or other containers
indicating botanical genus, species, and size of each.
E. Plants cut back from larger sizes to meet specifications shall be rejected.
F. Balled and burlapped deciduous shrubs may be acceptable in lieu of container growth deciduous
shrubs only if there is a significant shortage of container grown stock.
2.02 PLANTS
A. All plants shall comply with federal and state laws requiring inspection for plant disease and
infestations.
B. Any inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each delivery of plants and such
certificate shall be filed with the Landscape Architect. All plants shall be subject to inspection and
approval at the place of growth or upon delivery to the site for their quality, size, species, and
variety. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection at the site or during
progress of work for size and condition of the plants, latent defects, or injuries. Any and all rejected
plants shall be removed immediately from the premises by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
make all replacements at his expense should he fail to comply in full with any of the specifications.
Necessary replacements will be made as soon as weather conditions permit and all such plants
replaced shall conform to all specifications herein
C. Names and Grades:
1. Plant names shall conform to the nomenclature of"Standard Plant Names" or "Bailey's
Encyclopedia of Horticulture." When a mane is not found in either reference, consult the
accepted name used in the nursery trade. All plants shall be tagged by the nursery with the
proper identification labels to insure the correct varieties of plants.
2. Size and grading standards shall conform to those of the American Association of Nurserymen,
Inc., as published in "American Standard for Nursery Stock", 1959 Edition, with all current
revisions unless otherwise specified.
3. The caliper of trees shall be measured six (6) inches above the surface of the ground.
4. Measurements on all trees and shrubs shall be taken with the branches in a normal position.
Height and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from branch
or root tip to tip. No trees which have had their leaders cut or so damaged that cutting is
necessary, will be accepted.
D. No substitution of size, grade, variety or any species shall be permitted except by written permission
of the Landscape Architect.
E. Plant Size:
1. All plants shall conform to the size, age, and condition as specified in the plant list shown on the
drawings. Undersized plant material shall not be approved.
2. No additional compensation shall be due the Contractor if larger than specified plant material is
provided.
3. Due to the large size of the trees and evergreens being specified, only balled and burlapped or
container stock shall be accepted. No bare root stock shall be accepted.
F. Plant List:
1. Plants lists indicate minimum size requirements only. Plant materials shall be equal to or greater
in size than those specified.
Section 02910 Planting
2. Any discrepancies between plant lists and plans shall be immediately brought to the attention of
the Landscape Architect,
3. In all cases the Contractor shall be held responsible for all plant materials indicated on the plans
unless otherwise directed in writing by the Landscape Architect.
4. Each bidder shall investigate sources of supply and satisfy himself that he can supply all of the
plants mentioned in the planting lists in size, variety, and quantity noted and specified before
submitted his bid. Failure to take this precaution will not relieve the successful bidder from his
responsibility as Contractor to furnish and install all plant material in strict accordance with the
contract requirements without additional expense to the owner.
G. All plants shall be fresh and vigorous, of normal habit and growth, and free of disease, insects and
insect eggs and insect larvae, weeds and weed seed. No heeled -in plants from cold storage shall be
accepted except on approval by the Landscape Architect prior to installation.
2.03 TREE STAKES & TIES
A. Tree stakes shall be two (2) inch by two (2) inch by eight (8) foot wood stakes used as indicated on
the plans.
B. Tree stake ties shall be manufactured of virgin flexible vinyl meetings ASTM -D-412 standards for
tensile and elongation strength. The material shall be black in color for ultraviolet resistance. Hose
and wire shall not be used.
2.04 TOPSOIL
A. All planting areas shall receive either a minimum of four (4) inches of stockpiled or imported topsoil
in turf areas and twelve (12) inches in planting beds.
B. All topsoil used on this project (stockpiled or import) shall meet the following criteria:
1. pH: ..................................... .................................................... 5.5 -8.0
2. EC (electrical conductivity): ................................................... <2.0 mmhos per centimeter
3. SAR (sodium absorption ratio): .............................................. <3.0
4. % OM (percent organic matter): ............................................. >2%
5. Texture (particle size per USDA classification):
a.... Sand: ...............................................................................<70%
b.... Clay: ................................... ............................................ <30%
c.... Silt: .................................................... ............................. Balance
6. Stone Fragments (gravels or any soil particle
greater than two (2) min is size): ............................ ............... <5% (by volume)
C. In addition, the topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural loam and shall be capable of sustaining
vigorous plant growth. It shall be free of stones, lumps, clods of hard earth, plants or their roots,
sticks, and other extraneous matter. The topsoil shall contain no noxious weeds nor their seeds. It
shall not be used for planting operations while in a frozen or muddy condition.
2.05 MULCH
A. Shredded bark mulch shall be used as a top dressing for all planting beds unless specified otherwise.
B. Shredded bark mulch shall conform to the following criteria:
1. Bark pieces shall not exceed two (2) inches when passed through a screen of that size.
2. Large chunks of bark or wood shall not be mixed in with the mulch. j
3. The bark mulch shall be primarily from coniferous trees.
C. Where used, the shredded bark mulch shall be place to a depth of three (3) inches on top of the
topsoil.
D. Other mulches may be used only as specified on the drawings or in the planting notes and details.
2.06 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial fertilizer shall be uniform in composition, dry, and free flowing. Deliver fertilizer
mixed as specified in bulk or bag, labeled with appropriate tags indicating weight analysis, formula,
Section 02910 Planting
and manufacturer's name.
B. A 16-16-16 balanced fertilizer shall be used. Any exceptions to this formula shall be based on
horticultural recommendations resulting from a site-specific soils test, and must be approved prior to
application by the Landscape Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Site Visit: The Contractor shall visit and inspect the site. He shall take into consideration known
and reasonably inferable conditions affecting work. Failure to visit the site will not relieve the
Contractor of furnishing materials and performing the work required.
B. Prior to any planting operations, the irrigation system shall be fully operational and all planting areas
shall be thoroughly moistened.
C. Where weeds or other undesirable vegetation are present in planting areas, the Contractor shall apply
a contact herbicide a minimum of ten (10) days prior to commencement of any planting or irrigation
work. Apply herbicide per manufacturer's recommendations. The poisoned vegetation shall be
allowed to completely die back, including the roots, before proceeding with the work. Dead
vegetation shall then be removed from the site and disposed of in a legal manner.
D. The Contractor shall conform to the following requirements with regard to existing vegetation:
1. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage to existing trees or shrubs. He shall
use all reasonable means to protect and preserve plants on the project not designated for
demolition.
2. No pruning, thinning, or cutting of existing vegetation shall be allowed unless written
permission is given by the Landscape Architect.
3. The Contractor shall replace any trees or existing shrubs damaged by him or his sub -contractors
with like kind and size.
3.02 PLANTING SEASONS
A. All new plant installation shall be completed between April 15 and October 15. If planting must be
done after October 15 or before April 15, the Contractor shall obtain specific approval to do so from
the Landscape Architect prior to beginning any planting operations.
B. No planting shall be done in frozen soil or during unfavorable weather conditions, subject to the
approval of the Landscape Architect.
3.03 TOPSOIL
A. The Contractor shall obtain a soil analysis from any authorized soil testing agency of any existing
stockpiled or imported topsoil to be used on the project to verify that its conforms to the topsoil
specifications. Test results shall include horticultural recommendations. The soil samples shall be
obtained per the testing agency directions. Allow ten (10) working days to obtain test results. The
costs for such testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Prior to delivery of the imported topsoil to the site, the Contractor shall provide the name and
location of the topsoil source, along with the certified soil analysis of the topsoil to be used. The
analysis shall verify that the proposed topsoil meets the topsoil specifications, and is capable of
supporting healthy plant growth.
C. The following procedure shall be followed in placing all topsoil:
1. All areas to receive topsoil which have a slope of less than ten (10) percent shall be cross -ripped
to a depth of four (4) to six (6) inches.
2. The subgrade material shall be rough graded to plus or minus one tenth (+0,1) foot of the final
rough grade, which will allow the Contractor to achieve final finished grade through the
placement of the topsoil.
3. The surface of the subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of two (2) inches to provide a transition
zone between the subgrade and the topsoil. Place the topsoil on the subgrade and fine grade to
the final finished grade and topsoil depths as indicated on the drawings and in these
specifications.
Section 02910 Planting
4. Any required soil amendments (i.e. mulch, organic matter, etc.) shall be placed directly on the
topsoil at the required rates and spread evenly over the planting area. The amendments shall
then be thoroughly blended into the topsoil to a depth of four (4) inches. Where only a dry,
granular fertilizer is to be added, it may be applied to the surface and raked in during the fine
grading procedures.
D. The Contractor shall maintain a minimum of two (2) percent drainage away from all buildings,
structures, and walls. Finished grades shall be smoothed to eliminate puddling or standing water.
E. All finished grades shall be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to installation of any plant
materials.
3.04 PLANT CONDITION
A. All precautions customary in commercial landscape installation practice shall be taken in preparing
plants for planting. Workmanship that fails to meet these minimum standards shall be rejected. All
balled and burlapped plants shall have firm and natural balls of earth around their roots. No plant
shall be planted if the rootball is cracked or broken, either before or during the process of planting.
Loose, broken, or manufactured rootballs shall be rejected.
B. All plants materials in five (5) gallon containers or larger shall have been established in that
container for a period of not less than six (6) months and not more than two (2) years. Plant material
shall not be root bound. They shall exhibit sound, healthy, and vigorous growth and be free from
diseases and pests.
C. The contractor shall have the Landscape Architect approve plant material size and quality prior to
installation. Any plants which are not true to form, appear stressed or unhealthy, are infested with
pests, infected with disease, or are undersized for their containers shall be rejected.
D. All plant material shall be planted as soon upon arrival on the premises as possible. If planting
cannot be done immediately, the roots shall be protected from the sun and kept in a moist condition
until the time of planting. Such protection may be provided by laying the plants on the north side of
the building and covering the roots with wet straw or sawdust.
E. If it is anticipated that planting will not be done for more than twenty-four (24) hours after the arrival
of plants upon the premises, the balled and burlapped stock shall be heeled -in on the north side of a
building and all roots completely covered with dirt which shall be wetted down frequently. Care will
be taken in the handling of all balled and burlapped materials so that the earth around the roots is
disturbed as little as possible.
3.05 PLACEMENT OF PLANTS
location of all plants and planting areas with identified plant stakes, and no excavation sA. Plants shall be generally located as indicated by the drawing. The Contractor shall stake out the
commence until such locations have been approved by the City Project Manager and Lahall
ndscape
Architect.
B. In the event that underground construction work or obstructions are encountered during excavation
of the plant holes, alternate locations will be assigned and approved by the City Project Manager and
Landscape Architect.
C. Except for turf and groundcovers, plants shall not be placed within twelve (12) inches of sprinkler
heads.
D. The Contractor must locate and stake any sprinkling head or valve box within 10' feet of proposed
tree location, and must establish the direction of the lateral or main irrigation line that serves the
staked sprinkler head or valve box. This procedure will help eliminate hitting underground irrigation
pipes.
3.06 PLANT INSTALLATION
A. All concrete work, sprinkling systems, and finished grading shall be completed and approved by the
Landscape Architect before any planting of the specified plant materials is begun.
B. No tree planting shall be initiated until the sprinkling system is completed, tested, and operational.
However, tree planting shall precede lawn planting.
C. Each plant will be placed in an individual plant pit. The sharing of plant pits shall not be allowed.
Section 02910 Planting
D. All trees and shrubs shall be planted in pits as detailed in the planting details contained herein or as
noted on the drawings. Tree and shrub pits shall be circular in outline, with a diameter at least three
(3) times the diameter of the rootball of each plant to be installed. They shall be one to two and one
half (1 - 2 /,) inches shallower than the rootball depth. When the plant is properly placed in the plant
pit, the root collar shall be approximately one (1) inch above finished grade. The sides of the plant
pit shall be roughened, and not smooth or sculpted.
E. Plant backfill mix shall be one hundred (100) percent native site soil.
F. For container grown plants, remove the container and place the plant vertically in the plant pit,
directly on undisturbed soil. The root crown or collar shall be at orjust above the finished grade.
G. For balled and burlapped plants, place the plant vertically in the center of the pit, with the rootball
resting on undisturbed soil. Cut and remove the wire basket and burlap or other wrapping material
from the rootball. This shall be done with the rootball in the pit. Any burlap or wire pieces
underneath the rootball may be left in place if they cannot be removed. Do not fold the burlap over,
but cut away as much as possible without disturbing the rootball. No burlap shall be pulled from
under the rootball. Backfill the bottom one third (1/3) of the plant pit as the wire and burlap are
removed. In all cases, maintain the integrity of the rootball.
H. Specified backfill material shall be carefully and firmly worked and tamped under and around the
rootball to fill all voids. When backfilled and compacted to two thirds (2/3) the depth of the pit,
thoroughly water with a hose to completely soak the roots and remove any air pockets.
1. The plant pit shall then be completely backfilled with the specified backfill mix and tamped well. A
shallow watering basin or rain cup shall be formed around each plant. This basin will be equal in
diameter to that of the original planting pit.
J. Monitor all plants to insure that no settling occurs. Pits which settle shall be immediately filled with
additional soil mixture.
K. After planting, the following operations shall be performed:
1. Stake and mulch all trees per installation details.
2. Remove all nursery stakes ties, and tags from all plants. Prune and remove any dead, damaged,
or broken branches. Maintain side growth on all trees.
3.07 STAKING
A. All trees, including evergreen trees, shall be staked.
B. Staking shall be perforated as follows:
1. Two (2) 2"x 2" wood stakes, eight (8) feet in length, shall be used to support each tree planted
under this contract unless otherwise indicated.
2. Tree ties shall conform to the staking detail shown on the planting detail sheet.
3. Each stake will be located adjacent to the rootball, on opposing sides, to provide maximum
support to the trunk. Do not penetrate the rootball with the stake.
4. The stakes will be driven into the pit bottom after the tree has been placed in the pit, but before
backfilling begins so as to avoid damage to the roots.
C. Stakes and ties shall be removed after one (1) full growing season from the time the tree was
installed.
D. Tree stakes shall be placed such that they are aligned with or parallel to the prevailing direction of
the major or daily winds in that particular location.
3.08 WATERING
A. All plants shall be thoroughly watered immediately after planting. This shall mean full and thorough
saturation of all backfill in the pits and beds during the same day of planting. Water shall be applied
only by open end hose at very low pressure to avoid air pockets, injury to the plant, or washing away
of backfill. When installed, watered, and fully settled, the plants shall be vertical.
B. Subsequent watering shall be provided by the site's irrigation system. The Contractor shall insure
that all plants, especially trees, receive sufficient water to maintain healthy growth and vigor.
Overwatering shall be avoided, and prolonged saturation of the soil around the trees shall be
eliminated by appropriately controlling the irrigation circuit which provides water to that area.
3.09 MULCHING
Section 02910 Planting
A. Shredded bark mulch shall be placed to a depth of three (3) inches on top of the topsoil in all planting
beds and over tree planting pits.
B. The finished grade of the bark mulch shall be as follows:
1. Two (2) inches below the surface or finished grade of any paving, mowstrips, or walks adjacent
to the planting area.
2. At adjacent finished grade of the turf surrounding tree planting pits.
C. In tree pits, the bark shall be kept a minimum of six (6) inches away from the base of the tree.
D. Just prior to placement of the mulch, the Contractor shall treat the mulched areas with a pre -emergent
herbicide according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.10 SOD INSTALLATION
A. Sod shall be obtained only from approved sources. The sod shall have been mowed regularly and
carefully maintained from planting to harvest.
B. The sod shall be free of grassy and broad -leaf weeds, contain no bare or burned spots, and be clean
and strongly rooted. It shall be of the varieties noted on the plans and notes.
C. The sod shall be cut using approved methods and equipment. It shall be cut in pieces not exceeding
one (1) square yard, with a minimum of one (1) inch and maximum one and one half (1 ''/z) inch
thickness.
D. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect of the source of the sod prior to placement. The
sod shall be stripped and delivered to the site not more than twenty four (24) hours prior to laying.
The sod shall be maintained in a moist and healthy condition to encourage immediate growth.
E. The following procedure shall be followed when installing the sod:
I. Lay the sod on smooth, moist topsoil, working off planks if required.
2. Rake the topsoil to loosen and level prior to placing each course of sod.
3. Lay strips perpendicular to the direction of the slope. Strips shall be parallel to each other, with
their end seams staggered. The sod shall be neither stretched nor overlapped, and all joints shall
be butted tightly together.
4. Thoroughly water with a fine spray to a depth sufficient that the underside of the new sod and
the soil immediately below the sod are thoroughly wet.
5. On slopes two (2) horizontal to one (1) vertical or steeper, lay the sod perpendicular to the slope
and secure every row with wooden pegs at two (2) feet maximum on center. Drive the pegs
flush with the soil portion of the sod.
3.11 CLEAN UP
A. Throughout the course of planting, excess and waste materials as well as excavated subsoil shall be
continuously and promptly removed. All areas shall be kept clear and all reasonable precautions
taken to avoid damage to existing structures, plants, and grass.
B. When planting has been completed in an area, it shall be thoroughly cleaned of all debris, rubbish,
subsoil, and waste materials. These shall be removed from the property and disposed of legally. All
planting tools shall also be put away.
C. The ground surface shall be left in a condition satisfactory to the City Project Manager and
Landscape Architect.
3.12 AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS
A. The Contractor shall keep a record of all departures from the working drawings that occur during
construction. These changes shall be shown on a clean set of prints, and the prints kept on the job
site at all times for review.
B. As a part of his observation work, the Landscape Architect shall review the as -built drawings
regularly to verify that changes are being recorded. At the conclusion of the work, the Contractor
shall present the drawings to the Landscape Architect they shall become part of the permanent record
of the project.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
Section 02910 Planting
A. Substantial Completion:
1. At substantial completion of all planting work outlined in these plans, the Contractor shall
contact the Landscape Architectto arrange for a walk through to verify that all aspects of the
work have been completed. Work must be fully completed (except for final clean-up) according
to all plans, notes, and specifications and exhibit professional workmanship. Substantial
completion shall be defined as the complete installation of all plant materials, staking, mulching,
and other work on the project in its entirety. Substantial completion shall not be given on
designated portions of a project.
2. Notice by the Contractor shall be given, in writing, at least three (3) days in advance to the
Landscape Architect so that proper scheduling can be made for those who are to attend.
3. At the appointed time, an inspection of all plant materials, including staking and mulching, shall
be made.
4. A list of uncompleted items (punch list) shall be generated by Landscape Architect and
distributed to the Contractor and other involved parties within three (3) days of the substantial
completion inspection. Each item on the punch list shall be corrected before the project will be
approved and accepted by the Landscape Architect. The Contractor will be back charged for
time spent by the Landscape Architect and any consultants who have been brought to the site for
a final inspection when the project is not ready for said inspection.
B. Maintenance/Establishment Period:
1. The maintenance/establishment period shall begin one (1) day after the substantial completion
inspection. The Contractor shall complete all punch list items during this period, as well as
maintain and operate the entire irrigation system.
2. The Contractor shall maintain all plantings until the turf is frilly established. The turf shall be
considered fully established when grass stands come in uniform and thick, with no bare or thin
spots, and roots have begun to spread and knit together. No weeds shall be allowed in the grass.
This shall be a minimum period of sixty (60) days. The maintenance work required shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a. Appropriate watering of all plant materials.
b. Weeding and removal of all weeds from groundcover and planting areas.
c. Replacement of any dead, dying, or damaged trees, shrubs, perennials, or groundcover.
d. Filling and replanting of any low areas which may cause standing water.
e. Adjusting or sprinkler head heights and watering patterns.
f Filling and recompaction of eroded areas, along with any required reseeding and/or
replanting.
g. The grass shall be mowed when the blades reach three (3) inches tall and maintained to a
minimum height of two (2) inches. No more than one third (1/3) of the blade shall be
removed per cutting. The cutting frequency shall be once every five (5) to seven (7) days
depending upon grass height and growth rate.
h. Weekly removal of all trash, litter, clippings, and all foreign debris.
i. At thirty (30) days after planting, a balanced fertilizer (16-16-16) shall be applied to the
grass areas at a rate of one half ('/z) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet.
j. At intervals of thirty (30) days after the first application of fertilizer to the grass, apply a
balanced fertilizer (16-16-16) at a rate of one half (%,) pound of nitrogen per one thousand
(1,000) square feet until the grass is established.
C. Final Acceptance:
1. A final inspection shall be held prior to the end of the maintenance period to insure that all
punch list items have been completed and the entire project is ready for acceptance by the
Owner.
2. Upon satisfaction that the Contractor has completed all punch list items, the irrigation system is
fully and completely functional, and the required As -Built drawings and maintenance manuals
have been submitted, the Owner shall accept the project.
3. An official letter of final acceptance shall be prepared and issued to the Contractor, and
designer.
3.15 GUARANTEE
Section 02910 Planting
A. Upon final acceptance of the project as being properly installed, the Contractor shall guarantee the
plant materials as follows:
1. All shrubs and groundcovers shall be guaranteed by the Contractor as to growth and health for a
period of sixty (60) days after completion of the maintenance period and final acceptance.
2. All trees shall be guaranteed by the contractor to live and grow in an acceptable upright position
for a period of one (1) year after completion of the maintenance period and final acceptance.
B. The Contractor shall, within fifteen (15) days after receiving written notification by Landscape
Architect, remove and replace all guaranteed plant materials which die or become unhealthy or
appear to be in a badly impaired condition at any time during the guarantee period. Any plants that
settle below or rise above the desired finished grade shall also be reset to the proper grade.
C. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind, size, and quality as originally specified in the
"plant list" and they shall be furnished, planted, staked, and maintained as specified herein at no
additional cost.
D. The Contractor will not be responsible for plants destroyed or lost due to occupancy of the project,
vandalism on the part of others, or improper maintenance or lack thereof.
E. At the conclusion of the guarantee period and prior to final inspection of the plant materials by the
Landscape Architect, the Contractor shall remove all tree stakes. This period of time shall be
approximately I year after initial planting.
1. Stakes shall be removed by first cutting the ties securing the tree to stakes and secondly pulling
stakes or guys out of the ground.
2. Stakes shall not be broken off above, at, or below ground levels but removed completely.
F. At the conclusion of the guarantee period a final inspection of all planting included in this contract
shall be made by the Landscape Architect. At that time any plant found to be unhealthy, broken,
damaged, or otherwise in an impaired condition shall be noted. Plants so noted shall be removed
immediately from the site by the Contractor and replaced by him, as specified under this section,
with plants of like kind and size in the manner previously specified for the original planting without
extra compensation.
END OF SECTION
Section 02910 Planting
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PARTI- GENERAL
10
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
I. Footings.
2. Foundation walls.
3. Slabs -on -grade.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following:
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica
fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
I. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating
percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
I. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
D. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-1
3. Form materials and form -release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
11. Vapor retarders.
12. Semirigidjoint filler.
13. Joint -filler strips.
14. Repair materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI -
certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI -certified Concrete Flatwork
Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and
that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
L Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,[ acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,]
qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade 1, according to ACI CP -01 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI -certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician
and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor
shall be an ACI -certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a
single manufacturer.
E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," [Sections 1 through 5.1
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Cast -in -Place Concrete
Section 03300-2
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth
concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as
follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; milt -release agent treated and edge sealed.
C. Structural 1, B -B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B -B (Concrete Form), Class l or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide
lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
E. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials.
F. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties
designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on
removal.
I. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than I inch (25 mm) to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than I inch (25 mm) in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive damp proofing or
waterproofing.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-3
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82,
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,
plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive
strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI
Class I plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source,
throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement ASTM C 150, Type I, gray.
B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
I. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57,
with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch (37.5 -mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 -mm)
sieve.
B. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or
natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8 -inch (9.5 -mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent
passing a No. 100 (0.15 -mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075 -mm) sieve; complying
with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory
trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
I. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs
based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-4
Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and
ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
f f�iO4,ur"A i]11"
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral,
static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such
loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and
position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
I. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off
templates or compacting -type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Do not chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in
the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-5
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other
debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain
proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is
attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing
concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce
bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support
reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing
reinforcing bars.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
L Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
2. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near
corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially
hardened concrete surfaces.
4. Use epoxy -bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete
thickness as follows:
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Cast -in -Place Concrete
Section 03300-6
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or
diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- (3.2 -mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action
will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random
contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as
indicated.
1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm)
below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section 'Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required,
lace or clip sections together.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is
complete and that required inspections have been performed.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by
Architect.
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of
ACI 301.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete
will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section
cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
I. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a
manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into
preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete
and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture
constituents to segregate.
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface
plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before
starting finishing operations.
Hemrolnu Metall Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-7
F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range
required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
G. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is
calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's
option.
2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade
uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and
defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -
surface irregularities.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent
to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as
indicated.
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect
before application.
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of
other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS 9:09.0340 Section 03300-8
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by
steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly
rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on
Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams
or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast -in
inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel -finish concrete surfaces.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -weather protection during
curing.
B. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If
removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
C. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,
including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308. 1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous
operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours
later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing
period.
3.10 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction
traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint
clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed
joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace
concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-9
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one-
half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18 -mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and
placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air
bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch
(13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than I inch (25 mm) in depth. Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has
dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard
Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area
at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching.
Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural
performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify
surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain
for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
I. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs,
rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to
reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other
objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by
cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into
adjacent concrete.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes l inch (25 mm) or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts
and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) clearance all around. Dampen
concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching
concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate.
Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as
adjacent concrete.
5. Repair random cracks and single holes t inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar
before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.
Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching
mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.
END OF SECTION 03300
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Cast -in -Place Concrete
MS #:09.0340 Section 03300-10
SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Masonry joint reinforcement.
4. Ties and anchors.
5. Embedded flashing.
6. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
7. Grouting of hollow metal frames.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metals" for metal items built into and attached to masonry.
2. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry" for wood elements attached to masonry.
3. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame,
installed under Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
D. Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
2. Hollow -metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 Section
"Steel Doors and Frames."
3. Anchors and fasteners built into masonry for work of other trades.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-1
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops the indicated net -area compressive strengths (f,,, _
1500psi) at 28 days.
B. Determine net -area compressive strength (fm = 1500psi) of masonry from average net -area j
compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit -strength method) according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530. UASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Determine net -area compressive strength (fm = 1500psi) of masonry by testing masonry prisms
according to ASTM C 1314. i
1.5 SUBMITTALS i
't
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.
Comply with ACI 315, 'Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show
elevations of reinforced walls.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end -dam units, and other special applications.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following:
1. Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required after initial selection,
showing the full range of exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the
completed construction.
2. Colored mortar.
3. Weep holes/vents.
4. Accessories embedded in the masonry.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting results of the
following for compliance with requirements indicated: IIL
1. Each type of masonry unit required
a. Include size -variation data for brick, verifying that actual range of sizes falls
within specified tolerances.
b. Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net -area
compressive strength of masonry units.
2. Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270, or as indicated.
E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items
complies with requirements:
1. Each type of masonry unit required.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-2
a. Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net -area
compressive strength of masonry units.
2. For bricks, include data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified
tolerances.
3. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C67.
4. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer,
brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery.
5. Each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type. Include statement of net -area
compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and net -area compressive strength of
masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 503/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
6. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.
7. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
8. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.
F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification.
2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
G. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type
and mortar type, provide statement of average net -area compressive strength of masonry units,
mortar type, and resulting net -area compressive strength of masonry determined according to
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
H. Cold -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used
to comply with cold -weather requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
C. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by
Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140.
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780
3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019
4. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per[ASTM C 1314
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-3
D. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those
of assemblies with fire -resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
1. Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of
installation, the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least
3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such
masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading
coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-4
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Section 2104.3 in the Uniform Building Code.
I. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7
days after completing cleaning.
E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
F. I. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or 90 deg F (32 deg C) with a
wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h), do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches
(1200 mm) ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the
standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified
dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will
impair the quality of completed masonry.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square -edged units for outside comers, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
1, Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive
strength of as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Weight Classification: Lightweight, Grade N, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide Type I, nonmoisture-controlled units.
4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.
5. Exposed Faces: Integral colors as selected from manufacturer's full range of colors and
honed block finish as indicated on drawings.
Remming Retail shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-5
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
1. Available Products:
a. Lafarge North America Inc.
b. Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement.
F. Cold -Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar
of composition indicated.
1. Available Products:
a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.
C. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.
d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA.
G. Water -Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
1. Available Products:
a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Tite.
b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry -Block
Mortar Admixture.
C. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheomix Rheopel
H. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-6
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from
materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B-2 coating.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (ZI80) zinc
coating.
3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold -rolled, carbon -
steel sheet hot dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.
4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.6 BENT WIRE TIES
2.7
W.
A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide. Z-
shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may
be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal.
a
0
RIGID ANCHORS
General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows:
1. 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/a inch (6.4 mm) thick by 24 inches 600 mm) long, with
ends turned up 2 inches (50 mm) or with cross pins.
2. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153.
MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS
Unit Type Inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable -iron wedge -type inserts.
B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of
dimensions indicated.
C. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque -controlled expansion anchors, with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed
in solid or grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon -steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-7
2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or
4) for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors.
2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where
indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:
I. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
2. Copper: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or HOI, cold -rolled copper sheet, 10-oz./sq. ft. (3-
kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0135 inch (0.34 mm) thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq.
ft. (5-kg/sq. m) weight or 0.0216 inch (0.55 mm) thick elsewhere.
3. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet (3.6 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal
flashing.
4. Fabricate through -wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel with ribs
at 3 -inch (75 -mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond.
a. Available Products:
1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney 3 -Way Flashing (Sawtooth).
2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3 -Way Interlocking Thruwall
Flashing.
5. Fabricate through -wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated
to receive countertlashing.
6. Fabricate through -wall flashing with drip edge, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by
extending flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30
degrees and hemmed.
7. Fabricate through -wall flashing with sealant stop, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch (19 mm) at exterior face of wall and down into
joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
8. Fabricate metal drip edges and sealant stops for ribbed metal flashing from plain metal
flashing of same metal as ribbed flashing and extending at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall with hemmed inner edge to receive ribbed flashing and form a hooked seam. Form
hem on upper surface of metal so that completed seam will shed water.
9. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into
wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and
hemmed.
10. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (75
mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back
on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for
retaining sealant backer rod.
11. Metal Expansion -Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS # 09.0340 Section 04810-8
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry
unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
0.142 -inch (3.6 -mm) steel wire, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either
two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.
1. Available Products:
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or
D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.
C. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB -Twin Rebar Positioner.
d. Wire -Bond; O -Ring or Double O -Ring Rebar Positioner.
2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
1. Available Manufacturers:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
C. ProSoCo, Inc.
2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to
provide required compressive strength of masonry.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-9
I . For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
2. Extended -Life Mortar for unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be
used instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option.
3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to Portland cement, mortar cement, and lime.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with Table 1. 15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality -control
testing indicated below:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
B. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished, per ASTM C 140.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS 9:09.0340 Section 04810-10
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths
indicated.
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
(30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they
are damp but not wet at time of laying.
H. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following:
1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.
4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). Do not vary
from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head -joint thicknesses by more
than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more
than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances
specified for warpage of units.
7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line
by more than 1/ 16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next.
Hemming Retail shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-11
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond
pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch (100 -mm)
horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive
mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh
masonry.
D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Build non -load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof
structure above, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells
of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to
provide 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space
anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge non -load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate,
or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches
final position.
4. At fire -rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure
above to comply with Division 7 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems."
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on
footings.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-12
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on
footings where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head
joints.
C. Lay structural -clay tile as follows:
1. Lay vertical -cell units with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide bed
joints with full mortar coverage on face shells and webs.
2. Lay horizontal -cell units with full bed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Keep drainage
channels, if any, free of mortar. Form head joints with sufficient mortar so excess will be
squeezed out as units are placed in position. Butter both sides of units to be placed, or
butter one side of unit already in place and one side of unit to be placed.
3. Maintain joint thicknesses indicated except for minor variations required to maintain
bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- (6- to 10 -mm-) thick
joints.
4. Where epoxy -mortar pointed joints are indicated, rake out setting mortar to a uniform
depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) and point with epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy -mortar
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in -
plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
Fit bond -breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side
of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
C. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a
compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).
Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.
3.6 LINTELS
A. Install steel lintels where indicated.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-13
B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for
brick -size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block -size units are shown without structural steel
or other supporting lintels.
C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer
wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and through inner wythe to within
1/2 inch (13 mm) of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of
wall is to receive furring or framing, cant' flashing completely through inner wythe and
turn flashing up approximately 2 inches (50 mm) on interior face.
3. At masonry -veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer,
and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under
building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm).
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and
turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
5. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"
for application indicated.
6. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking
hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Division 7 Section 'Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
7. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
8. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
9. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is
completed.
C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be
built into masonry.
D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing and as follows:
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-14
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing under brick sills. Turn wicking
down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
4. Space weep holes formed from plastic tubing 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
5. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with
loose -fill insulation.
6. Trim wicking material flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
E. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height equal to height of first course above
top of flashing, but not less than 2 inches (50 mm), to maintain drainage.
1. Fill cavities full height by placing pea gravel in cavities as masonry is laid so that at any
point masonry does not extend more than 24 inches (600 mm) above top of pea gravel.
F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity
drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on
them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and
prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform
inspections.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-15
B. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.
2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at
Contractor's expense.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) of wall area or portion
thereof.
D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140.
E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780.
F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,
where indicated.
C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking
tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes 20.
6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-16
3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil -
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension.
2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04810
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Unit Masonry Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 04810-17
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes structural steel and grout.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Mill test reports.
E. Source quality -control test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DIA, "Structural Welding
Code --Steel."
C. Comply with applicable provisions of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS
A. W -Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
MS#: 09.0340 Section 05120 -1
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel
washers.
Finish: Plain.
B. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy
hex head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain.
C. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B.
D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1. Configuration: As indicated:
2. Finish: Plain.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, Galvalume-type, rust -
inhibiting primer.
2.4 GROUT
A. Metallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, metallic aggregate
grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 -minute working time.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30 -minute working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "
Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."
Hemming Retail Shell #1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
MS#: 09.0340 Section 05120 - 2
B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
I
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
I
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
I. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: f
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded 4
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip -critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials.
5. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and r
standards:
I. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.5 mils (0.038 min). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints,
corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
i
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and
inspections and prepare test reports. Comply with testing and inspection requirements of Part 3,
Article "Field Quality Control."
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
C. In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected
according to requirements in AWS DL I for stud welding.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS#: 09.0340 STRUCTURAL STEEL
Section 05120 - 3
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Examination: Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of
anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance
with requirements.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and " Load and Resistance Factor
Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings."
C. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface
of base and bearing plates.
1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no
voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts.
D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.2 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances,
appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work.
Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
"Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint
on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
Hemming Retail Shell #t STRUCTURAL STEEL
MS#: 09.0340 Section 05120 - 4
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.
B. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the
following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 05120
Hemming Retail Shell #1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
MS#: 09.0340 Section 05120 - 5
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Steel weld plates and angles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B. Templates: For anchors and bolts.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B. Ferrous Metals:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold -formed steel tubing.
4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is
indicated or required by structural loads.
5. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by
structural loads.
C. Nonferrous Metals:
1. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6.
2. Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/13 632M, alloy 6061-T6.
3. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with
coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel
fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Fabrications !
MS #:09.0340 Section 05500-1
B. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either
ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers,
and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with MPI #79.
B. Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
Available Products:
a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer CM18/19.
b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
C. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer.
e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc -Rich Primer 97-670.
f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
g. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
h. As approved by Architect.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds
in steel.
D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -
Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day
compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize
distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion
without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds
smooth and blended.
3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locatejoints where least conspicuous.
4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Fabrications
MS #:09.0340 Section 05500-2
5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate
assembly and installation with other work.
Exterior Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Prime with zinc -rich primer.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after
assembly.
B. Steel and Iron Finishes:
1. Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or
ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable.
2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with
requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal
fabrications:
a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 113) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer:
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
b. Interiors (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except
those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on
fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set
metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true.
I. Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to be left as
exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication.
2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be
fastened to in-place construction.
3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
B. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Fabrications
MS #:09.0340 Section 05500-3
I . Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Fabrications
MS #:09.0340 Section 05500-4
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1.
Framing with dimension lumber.
2.
Framing with engineered wood products.
3.
Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4.
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
5.
Wood furring and grounds.
6.
Wood sleepers.
7.
Plywood backing panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product.
Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite -wood products, documentation indicating
that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
2. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain -of -custody certificates certifying that products
specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements.
Include evidence that mill is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited
certification body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the
American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project
I. Wood -preservative -treated wood.
2. Fire -retardant -treated wood.
3. Engineered wood products.
4. Power -driven fasteners.
5. Powder -actuated fasteners.
6. Expansion anchors.
7. Metal framing anchors.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340
Rough Carpentry
Section 06100-1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC -accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
I. Dimension lumber framing.
2. Laminated -veneer lumber.
3. Prefabricated wood I joists.
4. Rim boards.
5. Miscellaneous lumber.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that
show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a
qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in
contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated
according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
Hemming Retail Shen #1 Rough Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06100-2
1. Wood cants, trailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, [furring,] [stripping,] and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent for 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness or less,
no limit for more than 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness.
B. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: [Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species.
C. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Grade as indicated and the
following species:
1. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA.
2. Douglas fir -larch (north); NLGA.
D. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Any species and grade with a
modulus of elasticity of at least as indicated for single -member use.
2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Laminated -Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and
manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no
urea formaldehyde.
1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise 2600 psi.
2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,700,000 psi.
B. Wood I -Joists: Prefabricated units, I -shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural
composite lumber flanges and wood -based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges.
Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established
and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.
1. Provide I joists manufactured without urea formaldehyde.
2. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or
DOC PS 2, Exposure 1
3. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those
indicated.
4. Provide units complying with APA PRI -400, factory marked with APA trademark
indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and
compliance with APA standard.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Rough Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06100-3
C. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I joists
at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I -joists.
1. Material: All -veneer product.
2. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
3. Provide performance -rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board grade,
factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with
APA standard.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No.2 grade lumber with 19
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine, No. 3 grade; SPIB.
2. Eastern softwoods, No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA.
3. Northern species, No. 2Common grade; NLGA.
4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, in
thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) nominal thickness.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners[ with hot -dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel].
B. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Rough Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06100-4
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C. Basis -of -Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated
on Drawings:
D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis
and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing
agency.
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (ZI80) coating designation.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Glass -fiber -resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill
sealer; 1 -inch (25 -mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); selected from
manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for
attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated. I
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated
lumber.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Rough Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06100-5
G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
3. Table 23 -II -B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23 -II -B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code.
4. Table 2305.2, "Fastening Schedule," in BOCA's BOCA National Building Code.
5. Table 2306. 1, "Fastening Schedule," in SBCCI's Standard Building Code.
6. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two -
Family Dwellings.
7. Table 602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table 602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International One- and Two -Family Dwelling Code.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label.
END OF SECTION 06100
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Rough Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06100-6
SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing.
4. Underlayment.
5. Building paper.
6. Building wrap.
7. Sheathing joint -and -penetration treatment.
8. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC
content.
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.4: For composite -wood products, documentation indicating
that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
3. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain -of -custody certificates certifying that products
specified to be made from certified wood comply with forest certification requirements.
Include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited
certification body.
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following:
1. Preservative -treated plywood.
2. Fire -retardant -treated plywood.
3. Foam -plastic sheathing.
4. Building wrap.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheathing
MS 9:09.0340 Section 06160-1
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC -accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD -01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship":
1. Plywood.
2. Oriented strand board.
3. Particleboard underlayment.
4. Hardboard underlayment.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE -TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or
concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
B. Oriented -Strand -Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheathing
MS #:09.0340 Section 06160-2
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
B. Oriented -Strand -Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.
For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion -protective coating
having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
2.6 WEATHER -RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt -saturated organic felt), unperforated.
B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame -spread and smoke -developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap.
b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek.
3. Water -Vapor Permeance: Not less than 535 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per
ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
C. Building -Wrap Tape: Tape recommended by building -wrap manufacturer.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that
is approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density,
polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheathing
MS #:09.0340 Section 06160-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
3. Table 23 -II -B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23 -II -13-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code."
B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials
are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30K,
"APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
1. Comply with "Code Plus" installation provisions in guide referenced in paragraph above.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
2. Subflooring:
a. Glue and nail to wood framing.
3. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
4. Underlayment:
a. Nail or staple to subflooring.
HARDBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with AHA's "Application Instructions for Basic Hardboard Products" and with
hardboard manufacturer's written instructions for preparing and applying hardboard
underlayment.
1. Fastening Method: Nail underlayment to subflooring.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheathing
MS #:09.0340 Section 061604
3.4 WEATHER -RESISTANT SHEATHING -PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather -resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control -joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch (100 -mm) overlap, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2 -inch (50 -mm) overlap and a 6 -inch (150 -mm) end
lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.5 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Seal other penetrations
and openings.
2. Apply glass -fiber sheathing tape to glass -mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply
and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed
fasteners. Seal other penetrations and openings.
3. Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam -plastic sheathing panels and at items
penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and
sheathing.
3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except that at
flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over weather -resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
3. Lap weather -resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Paper -Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of
sheathing with weather -resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply covering
immediately after sheathing is installed.
END OF SECTION 06160
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheathing
MS #:09.0340 Section 06160-5
SECTION 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Lumber siding.
2. Lumber soffits.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product.
B. Samples: For each type of siding indicated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's
Board of Review.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process:
I. Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19
percent.
2. Plywood: AWPA C9. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 18
percent.
3. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
4. Application: All exterior lumber.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Exterior Finish Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06201-1
2.3 LUMBER SIDING
A. Provide kiln -dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20, factory coated with exterior
alkyd primer.
B. Species and Grade: Clear VG (Vertical Grain), Grade A redwood or western red cedar; NLGA,
WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Lumber Siding: Primed, complying with AHA A135.6 with manufacturer's standard exterior
primer.
1. Type: Tongue and groove, 3/a" thick by 3-1/2" (1x4 nominal).
2. Texture: Smooth
2.4 WOOD SOFFITS
A. Wood Soffits: Primed hardboard, complying with AHA A135.6, with manufacturer's standard
exterior primer.
1. Type: Tongue and groove, 3/a" thick by 3-1/2" (1x4 nominal).
2. Texture: Smooth
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to
penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate.
1. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face
fastening is required.
2. For applications not otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel or hot -dip galvanized
steel fasteners.
B. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18 -by -16 mesh.
C. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable
requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and
manufacturer of substrates for intended application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prime lumber to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required lengths and prime
ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting."
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Exterior Finish Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06201-2
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
B. Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of
siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses
lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate
more than one thickness of siding.
END OF SECTION 06201
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Exterior Finish Carpentry
MS #:09.0340 Section 06201-3
SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cold -applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing.
2. Cold -applied, emulsified -asphalt dampproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed
spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD -APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. ChemMasters Corp.
2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.
4. Henry Company.
5. Karnak Corporation.
6. Koppers Inc.
7. Malarkey Roofing Products.
8. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
9. Tamms Industries, Inc.
10. Or as approved by architect
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 4586, Type I, Class 1, fibered.
C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered or nonfibered.
D. VOC Content: 4.2 Ib/gal. or less.
HOlnming Retail Shell #1 Bituminous Dampproofing
MS #:09.0340 Section 07115-1
2.2 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ChemMasters Corp.
2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.
4. Henry Company.
5. Karnak Corporation.
6. Koppers Inc.
7. Malarkey Roofing Products.
8. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
9. Tamms Industries, Inc.
10. Or as approved by architect
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1,
D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
E. VOC Content: 0.2516/gal. or less.
2.3 PROTECTION COURSE
A. Protection Course: Unfaced, fan -folded, extruded -polystyrene board insulation, nominal
thickness 1/4 inch (6 mm) with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi (55 kPa) per
ASTM D 1621.
B. Protection Course, Roll -Roofing Type: Smooth -surfaced roll roofing complying with
ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type III.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Cut -Back Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
B. Emulsified -Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Asphalt -Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Bituminous Dampproofing
MS #:09.0340 Section 07115-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
3.2 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces
building interior.
1. Apply from finished -grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a
minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces
exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an
8 -inch- wide strip of asphalt -coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
3.3 COLD -APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. for
first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft.
3.4 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for
first coat and I gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, I fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3
gal./100 sq. ft., or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed -and -cured dampproofing. Comply
with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection
course.
I. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by
protection board manufacturer over cured coating.
2. Install protection course within 24 hours of installation of dampproofing (while coating is
tacky) to ensure adhesion.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Bituminous Dampproofing
Section 07115-3
END OF SECTION 07115
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Bituminous Dampproofing
MS #:09.0340 Section 07115-4
SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes penetrating water-repellent coatings for the following vertical surfaces:
I. CMU (Concrete Masonry Units)
2. Cast -in-place concrete
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agree to
repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified in Part 1
"Performance Requirements" Article within Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be I
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2
articles. —
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2 WATER REPELLENTS (CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS)
A. VOC Complying Water Repellents:
Hemming Retail shell #1 Water Repellents
MS #:09.0340 Section 07190-1
I . Aquatrete, Huls America (water-based silane, 100 percent solids, site mix 1:9 with
water).
2. Hydrozo Enviroseal 20, Hydrozo Inc. (water-based silane, 20 percent solids).
3. Baracade M.E., Tamms Industries (water-based siloxane, 100 percent solids, site mix 1:9
with water).
2.3 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS (CONCRETE FLOORS)
A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, monomeric compound containing 20 percent or
more solids of alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary
solvent cannier; and with 3.3 lb/gal. or less of VOCs.
Available Products:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; Aridox 40M.
b. ChemMasters; Aquanil Plus 40.
C. Gemite Products, Inc.; Gem Guard SL.
d. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; Enviroseal 20.
e. Pecora Corporation; Klear-Seal 9100 S.
I. Seal-Krete, Inc.; S -K High Solids.
g. Sonneborn Building Products, a division of ChemRex; White Rox 10 VOC.
h. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Baracade Silane 100.
i. Wacker Chemical Corp.; 1316.
B. Silane/siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blends with 3.3
Ib/gal. or less of VOCs.
1. Available Products:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; Aridox 40, Aridox 40 VOC or Aridsil VOC.
b. Chemprobe Coating Systems, L. P.; Deck A Pell 15%.
C. Gemite Products, Inc.; Gem Guard SX.
d. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; Enviroseal 7 and Hydrozo 100.
e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Aquapel, Hydroblock, or Hydropel WB.
f. Pecora Corporation; 910W.
g. ProSoCo, Inc.; SL 100 Water Repellent.
h. Seal-Krete, Inc.; Silane/Siloxane Water Repellent.
i. Sonneborn Building Products, a division of ChemRex; White Roc 10 WB.
j. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Baracade WB 244.
k. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.; RSI 1750 W Stain.
1. Wacker Chemical Corp.; OH 100.
C. Proprietary -Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, consisting of 1 or several different
resins (silanes or siloxanes), polymers, stearates, or oils plus other compounds or products of
components; and with 3.3 16/gal. or less of VOCs.
Available Products:
a. ChemMasters; Colorsil Pigmented.
Hemming Retail shell #1 Water Repellents
MS #:09.0340 Section 07190-2
b. Hydrozo, a division of ChemRex; Enviroseal Double 7 and Enviroseal Double 7
Brick.
C. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Aquapel Plus.
d. OKON, Inc.; W-2.
C. Textured Coatings of America, Inc.; Rainstopper 100.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water
repellents. Test for moisture content, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written
instructions, to ensure that surface is dry enough.
1. Cast -in -Place Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances
that could prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents.
2. Clay Brick Masonry: Clean clay brick masonry per ASTM D 5703.
B. Test for pH level, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure
chemical bond to silicate minerals.
C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water
repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility
of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.
D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to
surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and
compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant
materials identical to those used in the work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect the j
substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and
application method to be used.
B. Apply a heavy -saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment
using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using
airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Precast Concrete: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on precast
concrete units may be completed before installing units. Mask sealant -bond surfaces to
prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Water Repellents
MS #:09.0340 Section 07190-3
C. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after
rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if
written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by
water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent
application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
END OF SECTION 07190
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Water Repellents
MS 4:09.0340 Section 07190-4
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART I — GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed building thermal insulation.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies"
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified.
C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing
agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including
those for thermal resistance, fire -test -response characteristics, water -vapor transmission, water
absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single -Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation
from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated
without delaying the Work.
B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -
response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as
determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire -Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Building Insulation
Section 07210-1
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
PART 2—PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Glass -Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation.
d. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced
standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
2. Use of asbestos containing materials is strictly prohibited.
B. Faced Mineral -Fiber Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A
(blankets with reflective vapor -retarder membrane facing and flame spread of 25 or less); with
foil -scrim -kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on I face.
I. Mineral -Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
2. Flanged Units: Provide blankets fabricated with facing incorporating 5 -inch- (127 -mm-)
wide flanges along edges for attachment to framing members.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions
affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
Projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Building Insulation
Section 07210-2
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice
and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or
use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between closed -cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C. Set vapor -retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
I. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Install mineral -fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where
insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Building Insulation
Section 07210-3
SECTION 07410 — PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preformed, prefinished metal wall panels and flashings.
B. Miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, gutters, downspouts, and
accessories.
C. Sealant
D. Fastening devices.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05120: Structural Steel.
B. Section 05500: Miscellaneous metal fabrication.
C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry.
D. Section 07620: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
E. Section 07920: Joint Sealants.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Iron & Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold -formed
Steel Structural Members.
B. ASTM A-653 & ASTM A924 Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
C. Spec Data Sheet - Galvalume Sheet Metal by Bethlehem Corp.
D. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
E. Building Materials Directory - Underwriter's Laboratories, Test Procedure 580.
1.04 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. The assembly includes preformed sheet metal panels, related accessories, valleys,
hips, ridges, eaves, corners, rakes, miscellaneous flashing, attaching devices, gutters, and
downspouts. All parts of assembly to match profile and finish of existing building.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07410-1
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (Wall Panels):
A. Delegated Design: Design metal wall panel assembly, including comprehensive
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding
the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated,
based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind
pressures:
a. Refer to section I.Design Criteria as indicated in the drawings on sheet
SE001 General Structural Notes.
2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with
horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed drawings showing layout of panels, anchoring details, joint details,
trim, flashing, and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing, terminations, and
penetrations of metal work.
B. Submit a sample of each type of panel, complete with factory finish.
C. Submit results indicating compliance with minimum performance requirements listed
above.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Architectural Sheet Metal Products with ten
(10) years minimum experience.
B. No product substitutions shall be permitted without meeting specifications.
C. Substitutions shall be submitted 10 Days prior to Bid Date and acceptance put forth in
an addendum.
D. No substitutions shall be made after the Bid Date.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt of panels and other materials, installer shall examine the shipment for
damage and completeness.
B. Panels should be stored in a clean, dry place. One end should be elevated to allow
moisture to run off.
Hemming Retell Shell #1 Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07410-2
C. Panels with strippable film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun.
D. Stack all materials to prevent damage and to allow for adequate ventilation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Paint finish shall have a twenty year guarantee against cracking, peeling and fade (not
to exceed 5 N.B.S. units).
B. Galvalume material shall have a twenty year guarantee against failure due to
corrosion, rupture or perforation.
C. Applicator shall furnish guarantee covering water -tightness of the panel system for
the period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2PRODUCT
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Berridge Manufacturing Company, Houston, Texas.
B. Mueller Inc.
C. Or equal: Substitutions shall frilly comply with specified requirements.
2.02 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Prefinished Metal shall be Hot -Dipped Galvanized - ASTM A446-85 Grade C G90
Coating A525-86 24 Gauge core steel or prefinished Galvalume - ASTM 792-86 AZ -55.
B. Unfinished Metal shall be Grade C Galvalume ASTM 792-86, AZ 55, "Satin Finish".
C. Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer coating coating, applied by the
manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70
to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95
to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil.
Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the
Kynar 500 finish supplier.
D. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish
during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed
before installation.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Galvanized Steel with washers where required.
B. Sealant: As specified in Section 07920 Joint Sealants.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07410.3
2.04 FABRICATION
A. All exposed adjacent flashing shall be of the same material and finish as the roof
panels.
B. Hem all exposed edges of flashing on underside, 1/2 inch.
2.05 "R" PANEL for roof and wall (Contractor to verify that panel matches existing panels in
profile and finish prior to ordering and installing new panels.)
1. Overall panel width to be 38-1/4", with 36" net coverage.
2. Panels shall be factory -formed to 40' max.
3. 1-1/4" high ribs to be spaced 12" on center, with 3/4" wide by 1/4" high minor ribs
spaced 4" on center between major ribs ("R" Panel).
4. Panel -to -panel and panel-to-purlin connections to be with No. 12-14 self -drilling
tapping fasteners, 1" min. for panel-to-purlin connections, 3/4" minimum for panel -to -
panel connections.
5. Compressible blanket insulation to be maximum 4-1/2" thickness before compression.
6. For roof applications, a line of tape sealant for weather tightness shall be used at panel
side laps and end laps.
7. Where required, panel assembly shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories Label UL90,
pursuant to Construction Number 161.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Substrate:
1. Examine plywood or metal deck or substrate to ensure proper attachment to
framing.
2. Inspect substrate to verify it is clean and smooth, free of depressions,
waves or projections, level to +/- 1/4" in 20', and roof deck is properly sloped to
valleys or eaves.
3. Verify roof/wall openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts or vents through
roof/wall are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips
located.
4. Verify substrate is dry and free of snow or ice. Flutes in steel deck to be clean
and dry and joints in wood deck to be solidly supported and nailed.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07410-4
B. Underlayment:
I. Verify #30 unperforated asphalt saturated roofing felt underlayment has been
installed over solid sheathing and fastened in place.
2. One (1) layer of #30 asphalt roofing felt paper for roof slopes of 3:12 and up,
two (2) layers for roof slopes of 1:12 - 3:12 in moderate climates (check with
manufacturer).
3. Grace Ice & Water Shield underlayment to be used on all curved applications
and on low (less than 1:12) slope or complex roofs per manufac.
recommendation.
4. Ensure felt installed horizontally, starting at eave to ridge with a 6" minimum
overlap and 18" endlaps.
5. Ensure that all nail heads are totally flush with the substrate. Nails shall be
galvanized roofing nails with Berridge Coated Felt Caps.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to standards set forth in
the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in order to achieve a
watertight installation.
B. Install panels in such a manner that horizontal lines are true and level and vertical lines
are plumb.
C. Install starter and edge trim before installing panels.
D. Remove protective strippable film prior to installation of panels.
E. Attach panels using manufacturer's standard fasteners, spaced in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
F. Install sealants for preformed panels as approved on shop drawings.
G. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.
H. Do not allow traffic on completed work. If required, provide cushioned walk boards.
1. Protect installed panels and trim from damage caused by adjacent construction until
completion of installation.
J. Remove and replace any panels or components which are damaged beyond successful
repair.
K. All miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, gutters, downspouts, and
accessories are to be installed such as to not allow water to infiltrate or penetrate into
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07410.5
building or wall and roof system and is to direct water away from building. Each of these
items is to be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. All parts of assembly to
match profile and finish of existing building.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean any grease, finger marks or stains from the panels per manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Remove all scrap and construction debris from the site.
END OF SECTION
Hemming Retail shell #1 Pre -Formed Metal Wall Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07410-6
SECTION 07411—METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Factory -formed and field -assembled, standing -seam metal roof panels.
2. Metal soffit panels.
B. Steel Sheet Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without metallic coatings or painted
finishes.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 90 for wind -uplift resistance class indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:
1. Wind Loads: 90 MPH acting inward or outward.
2. Snow Loads: 96 Ibf/sq. ft.
3. Deflection Limits: Vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof panels, including plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim,
flashings, closures, and accessories.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with
penetrations and roof -mounted items.
D. Samples: For each exposed finish.
E. Material certificates.
F. Field quality -control inspection reports.
G. Product test repots.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Roof Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07411-1
H.
1.4
in
In
1.5
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal roof panel assemblies
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of
factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period.
I. Siliconized Polyester Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
product selection: requirements apply for
L Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
B. Retainer Strips: 0.019 -inch- thick, formed, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to
match insulation facing.
Hemming Retail shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Metal Roof Panels
Section 07411-2
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6 -mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.
B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), asphalt -saturated organic felts.
C. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip -
resisting polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS -modified asphalt
adhesive, with release -paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
D. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 16/100 sq. ft., rosin sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with
heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating.
1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self -drilling or self -tapping, zinc -plated, hex -head carbon -
steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc -aluminum -alloy head and EPDM or
neoprene sealing washer.
2. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self -drilling or self -tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel
hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal roof panels.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws with hex washer
head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
C. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Factory -formed, designed to be field assembled by lapping
and interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and
mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips,
cleats, pressure plates, and accessories required for weathertight installation.
1. Steel Panel Systems: Comply with ASTM E 1514.
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. AEP -Span.
b. Architectural Building Components.
C. Architectural Roofing and Siding, Inc.
d. ATAS International, Inc.
C. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
I. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc.
Hemming Retail Sheli #1 Metal Roof Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07411-3
g. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
h. Copper Sales Inc.
i. Custom Panel Industries, LLC.
j. Delcoa Industries, Inc.
k. Englert, Inc.
1. Fabral, Inc.
M. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.
n. Galvamet Inc.
o. Innovative Metals Company, Inc.
p. K -Metals Inc.
q. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems.
c McElroy Metal, Inc.
S. Merchant & Evans, Inc.
t. Metal -Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
U. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
V. Modern Metal Systems, Inc.
W. Morin Corporation; a Metecno Group Company.
X. Perma-Clad Products.
y. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Z. Steelox Systems Inc.
aa. United Steel Deck, Inc.; Subsidiary of Bouras Industries, Inc.
bb. VICWEST; Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products.
3. Type: Vertical rib, seamed joint as indicated on Drawings.
4. Material: 24 ga. Steel.
a. Exterior Finish: Kynar 500
b. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors.
5. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.
a. Material: Metallic -coated -steel sheet.
6. Joint Type: Single folded.
7. Panel Coverage: 16".
8. Panel Height: 2".
9. Uplift Rating: UL 90.
I
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels,
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof
panels.
2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625 -inch- thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand
negative -load requirements.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Roof Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07411-4
3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250 -inch- thick, stainless-
steel or nylon -coated aluminum sheet.
4. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin -foam or
closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 -inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179 -inch- thick, metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance.
Locations include eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.
Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles
and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
C. Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory -installed captive gaskets or
separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, in a manner that
will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,
and other characteristics of item indicated.
E. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building -paper slip sheet on roof sheathing
under metal roof panels. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at locations indicated
on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Roof Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07411-5
B. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self -adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on
roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment
manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low
temperatures. Apply over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less
than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2
inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
C. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels
3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from cave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated
or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of
all openings. Fasten with self -tapping screws.
4. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices
and end laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition.
5. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the
material.
B. Fasteners:
Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by
applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies.
1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.
Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
3.4 FIELD -ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at
each standing -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by
manufacturer.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Metal Roof Panels
MS #:09.0340 Section 07411-6
I. Install clips to supports with self -tapping fasteners.
2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely
engaging factory -applied sealant.
3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer -approved motorized reamer tool
so clip, metal roof panel, and factory -applied sealant are completely engaged.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and
Provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim,
copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips,
and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal
roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07411
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Metal Roof Panels
Section 07411-7
SECTION 07620 — SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PARTIGENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials; fabricate and install the following.
1. Edge strip and flashing.
2. Base flashing coverings.
3. Counterflashings at walls and penetrations.
4. Other components.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Product Data
Submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or fabrication. Colors
will be selected from the manufacturer's full range.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards
1. Comply with details and recommendations of SMACNA Manual for
workmanship, methods of joining, anchorage, provisions for expansion, etc.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection:
1. Provide protection or avoid traffic on completed roof surfaces.
2. Do not overload roof with stored materials.
Ascertain that work of other trades which penetrates the roof or is to be made
watertight by the roof is in place an approved prior to installation of roofing.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Manufacturer's Warranty
Pre -finished metal material shall require a written 20 -year non -prorated
warranty covering fade, chalking and film integrity. The material shall
not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D-
2244 or chalking excess of 8 units per ASTM D-659. If either occurs
material shall be replaced per warranty, at no cost to the Owner.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
MS #:09.0340 Section 07620-1
B. Contractor's Warranty
1. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized written
warranty assuring that all sheet metal work including caulking and
fasteners to be watertight and secure for a period of two years from the
date of final acceptance of the building. Warranty shall include all
materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop,
and make good any damage to other work or equipment caused by such
leaks or the repairs thereof.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metals and Flashings:
1. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A526,0.20% copper, 26 gage
(0.0179"); designation G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill phosphatized.
2. Stainless Steel Sheet: Type 302/304, ASTM A167, 28 gage, (0.015"),
annealed except dead soft where fully concealed by other work, 2D
(dull) finish.
3. Lead -Coated Copper Sheet: ASTM B 101. Type I, Class A (12-15 1 Ib. of
lead coating per 100 sq. ft.), 17.1 oz. (0.022").
5. Zinc Alloy Sheet: Zinc with 0.6% copper and 0.14% titanium; 0.27"
thick (21 gauge); standard (soft) temper, mil finish.
B. Factory Finish: Kynar 500 Three -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620,
AAMA621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF
resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer
coating shall be applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line,
with a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime
coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. Bottom side shall
be coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish shall
conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility, and longevity as specified by the
Kynar 500 finish supplier.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range to
match new metal wall panels.
C. Strippable film shall be applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the
finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must
be removed before installation.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Metal Primer: Zinc chromate type.
B. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, No15 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
MS #:09.0340 Section 07620-2
D. Fasteners:
I. Corrosion resistant screw fastener as recommended by metal
manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal.
2. Fastening shall conform to Factory Mutual 1-90 requirements or as
stated on section details, whichever is more stringent.
Termination Bars:
1. Shall be aluminum unless otherwise recommended by membrane
manufacturers.
2. Material shall be .125" x 1" (minimum) aluminum conforming to ASTM
B-221, mill finish. Bar shall have caulk cup as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Protect contact areas of dissimilar metals with heavy asphalt or other approved
coating, specifically made to stop electrolytic action.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress, or
distortion, allowing for expansion and contraction.
B. Fastening of metal to walls and wood blocking shall comply with SMACNA
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Factory Mutual I-90 wind uplift
specifications and/or manufacturer's recommendations whichever is of the
highest standard.
C. All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of sheet metal
installation, whether specifically indicated or not, shall be provided and of the
same material as item to which applied.
D. Metal fascia and copings shall be secured to wood nailers at the bottom edge
with a continuous cleat. Cleats shall be at least one gauge heavier than the metal
it secures.
E. All miscellaneous trim, flashing, closures, drip flashing, gutters, downspouts,
and accessories are to be installed such as to not allow water to infiltrate or
penetrate into building or wall and roof system and is to direct water away from
building. Each of these items is to be installed per manufacturer's
recommendations. All parts of assembly to match profile and finish of existing
building.
3.3 SHOP FABRICATED SHEET METAL
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07620-3
A. Installing Contractor shall be responsible for determining if the sheet metal
systems are in general conformance with roof manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Metal work shall be shop fabricated to configurations and forms in accordance
with recognized sheet metal practices.
C. Hem exposed edges.
D. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drip.
E. All corners for sheet metal shall be lapped with adjoining pieces fastened and set
in sealant.
F. Install sheet metal to comply with Architectural Sheet Metal
manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National
Associations, Inc.
3.5 FLASHING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. PLUMBING STACK
1. Prime flange and sleeve at a rate of 100 square feet per gallon and allow
to dry.
2. Install properly sized sleeves in a 1/4" bed of elastomeric sealant.
3. Turn sleeve a minimum of 1" down inside of stack.
4. Caulk intersection of the membrane and flange with elastomeric sealant.
END OF SECTION 07620
HemmingRetail Shell #1
MS#:0.0340 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
MS #:09.
Section 07620.4
SECTION 07712 - GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Downspouts.
B. Related Accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet
and Plate.
B. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) Specification 1405.1
"Specification for Aluminum Raincarrying Systems".
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; showing dimensions of metal
gutters and accessories, fastening details and connections and interface with other
products.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Manufacturers warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
B. Installer Qualifications: Certified and approved sheet metal roofing installer.
Hemming Retail Shell #t Gutters and Downspouts
MS #:09.0340 Section 07712-1
C. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA Manual or CDA Handbook.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation
B. Store products to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation.
Slope stored materials to drain.
C. During storage prevent contact with materials capable of causing discoloration,
staining, or other damage.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate installation with installation of adjacent roofing, siding and related
materials.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide the Manufacturer's Limited 20 -Year, pro -rated and non -transferable
Warranty covering labor materials.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of floor finish materials to
avoid damage to installed underlayment and membrane materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Berger Building Products, Inc.
2. EMCO Building Products
3. Englert, Inc.
4. Gutter Suppliers, Inc.
5. Industrial Gutter Sales, Inc.
6. Park City Rain Gutter
7. Rainhandler
8. Senox Corporation
B. Substitutions:
2.2 COMPONENTS
As approved by Architect.
A. Downspouts: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209, Alloy 3105-H24. Minimum tensile
strength 26,000 psi, minimum yield strength 25,000 psi or equivalent.
1. Thickness:
a. 0.019 inch (0.48 mm).
2. Size:
a. 3 inches by 4 inches (76 mm by 102 mm).
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07712-2
b. 2 inches by 3 inches (51 mm by 76 mm).
B. Endcaps: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209, Alloy 3105-1124, thickness 0.027 inch
(0.69 mm).
C. Downspout Anchors: Aluminum. Provide types required to suit project
requirements.
D. Elbows: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209, Alloy 3105-1124. Minimum tensile
strength 26,000 psi, minimum yield strength 25,000 psi or equivalent.
I. Thickness:
a. 0.019 inch (0.48 mm).
2. Size: To match downspouts.
E. Aluminum Finish: Two -coat system applied in a continuous baked -on process in a
single operation, comprising of an acid -based primer and baked -on high
Performance linear polyester topcoat on exposed surfaces. Concealed surfaces
finished with a polyester gold backer or wash coat.
1. Color: As approved by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Sealant: Provide as specified in Section 07900.
G. Fasteners: Same material and finish as gutters and downspouts.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Form downspouts of profiles and sizes specified.
B. Hem exposed edges of metal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify governing dimensions at building.
C. Verify surfaces are ready to receive gutters and downspouts.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Clean and repair if necessary any adjoining work on which this work is in any way
dependent for its proper installation.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
Hemming Retail shell 1
MS #:09.0340
# Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07712-3
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install gutters and downspouts using appropriate hangers to allow normal expansion
and contraction.
C. Exercise care in placing aluminum in contact with other dissimilar metals or
materials that are not compatible with aluminum.
D. Providing adequate insulation/separation where ever necessary, such as by painting
or otherwise protecting when they are in contact with aluminum or when drainage
from them passes over aluminum surfaces.
E. Install sealants where indicated to clean dry surfaces only without skips or voids.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07712
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Gutters and Downspouts
Section 07712-4
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by
reference to this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and non -traffic horizontal
surfaces: t
a. Joints between different materials.
b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and
windows, louvers etc.
C. All joints to close the building to the elements.
d. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interiorjoints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non -traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior
walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior
doors, windows, and elevator entrances.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1
f. Joints between construction material to seal voids to prevent the passage of
sound.
3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing perimeter joints of
gypsum board partitions to reduce sound transmission.
2. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Joint Sealants
MS #:os.o3no Section 07920-1
perimeters of acoustical ceilings.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and
water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
C. Adhesion: When testing in conformance to ASTM C 794, joint sealant shall not fall in
adhesion.
D. Compatibility: When tested in conformance to ASTM C 1087, sealants shall be shown to
be compatible with project materials coming in contact with the sealant such as backers,
gaskets, and setting blocks.
E. Staining: When tested in conformance to ASTM C 1248, porous substrates shall show no
permanent staining.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint
sealants in 1/2 -inch- (l3 -mm-) wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- (150 -mm-) long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the
following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Materials tested to be specific to
those present with this application.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint
sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in joint -sealant installations (min. 50 projects or 5 years) with a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single
manufacturer.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Joint Sealants
MS #:09.0340 Section 07920.2
C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals"
Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within
a 36 -month period.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life,
curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures,
contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
I• When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint -Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until
contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of I
other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall i
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer and Manufacturer agreeing to ! _
repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
I
I Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration oration or failure of elastom
J sealants from the following: ertc
I. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant
manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression
caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Joint Sealants
Section 07920-3
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated
for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full
range.
2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements
indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint -Sealant
Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for
type, grade, class, and uses.
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in
the Elastomeric Joint -Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested
for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to
withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of
installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses
indicated.
C. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the
Elastomeric Joint -Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products
that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint
substrates indicated for Project.
D. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that
will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with
21 CFR 177.2600.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in
the Acoustical Joint -Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard,
nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Joint Sealants
MS #:09.0340 Section 07920-4 -
2.5 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
Type C: Closed -cell material with a surface skin.
C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -
substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of
staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Program: Contractor to establish and submit to Owner a Quality Control
Program including, but not limited to, logs, procedures, schedules for testing, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
e
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance I
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions —
affecting joint -sealant performance.
i
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Joint Sealants
MS #:09.0340 Section 07920-5
requirements:
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning,
mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out
joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete.
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,
harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience.
Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine
primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining
surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919
for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications,
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Joint Sealants
Section 07920-6
and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
Position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3• Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
E. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and back of joints.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth,
uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact
and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
I . Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Joint Sealants
Section 07920-7
3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Medium -Modulus Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant: Provide products complying with the
following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. 756 H.P, 790, 795 Dow Corning or equivalent products by GE, Pecora or
Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25.
4. Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50
percent movement in compression for a total of 100 percent movement.
5. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
a. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, , A, and, as applicable to joint
substrates indicated, O.
6. Applications: All exterior non -traffic joints and interior non -traffic expansion
joints.
7. Dirt and Stain Performance: Provide sealants that do not attract dirt or dust and
which are nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.
B. Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning.
b. Sanitary 1700; GE Silicones.
C. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation.
d. Tremsil 600 White; Tremco.
2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
3. Class: 25. i
4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
6. Applications: Joints between plumbing fixtures such as sinks, toilets, tubs, etc. and
adjacent surfaces.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Joint Sealants
MS #:09.0340 Section 07920-8
END OF SECTION 07920
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Joint Sealants
MS #:09.0340 Section 07920-9
SECTION 08113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section 'Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
2. Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field painting
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSUSDI A250.8.
C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
I. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory -applied color finishes.
D. Other Action Submittals:
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
MS #:09.0340 Section 8113-1
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing
agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -
site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs
and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical
position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch- (102 -mm-) high wood blocking. Do not
store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
Provide minimum 1/4 -inch (6 -mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and I
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with
integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
MS #:09.0340 Section 8113-2
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Firedoor Corporation.
7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Habersham Metal Products Company.
9. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.
10. Kewanee Corporation (The).
11. Mesker Door Inc.
12. Pioneer Industries, Inc.
13. Security Metal Products Corp.
14. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
15. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed
applications.
B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting,
or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow
metal frames of type indicated.
F. Grout ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers
manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- [o l2-Ib/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m) density; with
maximum Flame -spread and smoke -development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
"
1. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4 -mm) dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth
surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 8113-3
1. Design: Flush panel.
2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core.
a. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal -
resistance value (R -value) of not less than 4.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according
to ASTM C 1363.
1) Locations: Exterior doors, see floor plans.
3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 min).
4. Vertical Edges for Double -Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2 -1/8 -inch (54 -mm) radius.
5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch- (1.0 -mm-) thick, end closures
or channels of same material as face sheets.
6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.,,
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with
requirements indicated below by referencing ANSUSDI A250.8 for level and model and
ANSUSDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same
material as door face sheets.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet.
2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSUSDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet.
I . Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch- (1.3 -mm-) thick steel sheet.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with trtered or coped corners.
2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.
3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053 -inch- thick steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSUSDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from
same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 8113-4
1. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0
mm) thick.
2. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as
follows:
1• Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2• Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less
than 2 -inch (50 -mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material
as door face sheet in which they are installed.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same
material as frames in which they are installed.
D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above
opening in extension of frame with welded -steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth afinish floor with a [45) [90] -degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover
frame. nd flush with
1. Provide terminated stops unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4 -inch -thick by 1 -inch- (6.4 -mm -thick by 25.4 -mm-) wide steel.
C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to
required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work
that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in [SDI 117] [ANSI/NAAMM-
HMMA 861 ].
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doorsto permit moisture to
escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water
- Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. penetration.
Hemming Retail shell #1
MS #;09.0340 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 8113-5
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80
for fire -performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge
of door on which astragal is mounted.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,
provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush,
and invisible.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.
4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per
anchor.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom
of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors perjamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus l additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610
mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and mounted in
metal -stud partitions.
b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
C. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.
6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows.
Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled
steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware;
include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule
and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to [ANSI/SDI A250.8]
[ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 8611.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface -mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26
Sections.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of
stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
Hemming Retail shell #1 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
MS #:09.0340 Section 8113-6
I. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal
work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is
capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and
frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of
installation indicated.
2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
I• Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying
with ANSUSDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
B. Factory -Applied Paint Finish: Doors shall be field -painted
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
i
installation.
B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame €
C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance C
Of the Work.
I
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
I
A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling,
and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
I. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from
jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
3. Twist Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to Floor.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 8113-7
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
[ANSI/SDI A250.1 I] [HMMA 840].
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth
and undamaged.
a. At fire -protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field
splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make
splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
C. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e• Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly
set and secured.
f Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing
antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure
with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion
anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions,
including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.
6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
7. In -Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors
through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural
supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural
support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting
construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.
9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and
plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 8113-8
C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 nun), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured atjambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below.
Shim as necessary.
Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
C. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch (19
mm).
2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke -Control Doors: Install doors according to [NFPA 1051 [UBC Standard 7-21.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than
9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.
Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including
hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic -Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION O8113
Hemming Befall Shell #1 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
MS #:09.0340 Section 8113-9
SECTION 08411 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior storefront framing.
2. Exterior manual -swing entrance doors and door -frame units.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
"Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines
for Buildings and Facilities."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum -framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
I. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift
and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
C. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural
movements to glazing.
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
I. Sealant failure.
g. Failure of operating units.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads:
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.
b. Importance Factor: I.I.
C. Exposure Category: B
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
MS #:09.0340 Section 8411-1
C. Structural -Test Performance: Provide aluminum -framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as
follows:
2.
When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not evidence
deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems,
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
D. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum -framed systems that pass
missile -impact and cyclic -pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information
in ASTM E 1996.
t. Large -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade.
2. Small -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located more than 30 feet (9.1 m) above
grade.
E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum -framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting
from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors,
and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.
a. High Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature:
temperature of 180 deg F.
b. Low Exterior Ambient -Air Temperature:
3. Interior Ambient -Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
That which produces an exterior metal -surface
0 deg F.
Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum -framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having
an average U -factor of not more than [0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K)] [0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x
h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K)] <Insert U -factor> when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. htclude construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum -framed systems.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed systems. Include plans, elevations,
attachments to other work. sections, details, and
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in
the system to the exterior.
C. Maintenance Data: For aluminum -framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 8411.2
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum -framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based
on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated
for this Project.
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems'
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,
arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one
another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to
verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service
performance.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's
approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
E. Source Limitations for Aluminum -Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.
F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding
Code - Aluminum."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum -framed systems by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
C. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering,
d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
e. Failure of operating components.
2 Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 8411-3
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance
instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of entrance door hardware.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GA
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Arcadia, Inc.
2. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
3. CMI Architectural.
4. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc.
5. EFCO Corporation.
6. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
7. Leed Himmel Industries, Inc.
8. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.
9. TRACO.
10. Tubelite.
11. United States Aluminum.
12. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.
13. YKK AP America Inc.
MATERIALS
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/AS.10M.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer, complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select
surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces
according to applicable SSPC standard.
I. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 101 I/A 101 IM.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 8411-4
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness required
and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally improved.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front. i
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint
type.
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
B. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation.
1. Door Construction: 2- to 2 -1/4 -inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 -inch- thick, extruded -
aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets
that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. {
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members
exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
L
2. Door Design: As indicated in drawings. I
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.
I
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1
I
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements
except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 -mil (0.762 -mm) thickness per coat.
Hemming Hetali Shell #t Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
MS #:09.0340 Section 8411-5
2.7 FABRICATION i
6
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.
Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain
required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent
possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for [lush glazing without projecting stops. -
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
i
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent
possible. Cut, drill, and tap p for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. �
e
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
t
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. i
t
PART 3 - EXECUTION i
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
Nemtning Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340
Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 8411-6
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2• Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
E. Metal Protection:
1 Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2• Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint
Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or
rack.
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware
according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners
to greatest extent possible.
G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section
weathertight installation. "Joint Sealants" to produce
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
I• Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in
3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.
2• Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
E. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer
END OF SECTION 08411
Hemming Retail shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts
Section 8411-7
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division Ol Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
Commercial door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Other doors to the extent indicated.
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"
2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts"
C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating,
Purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.
Thresholds, weather stripping, and cylinders for locks specified in other Sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of
individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.
Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Sample
or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets, if requested. s before,
I• Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged
through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of
operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of ke i
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340
y ng requirements.
Door Hardware
Section 08710.1
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches, and closers as requested.
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include
final hardware and keying schedule.
F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
G. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the
Contract Documents.
2. Content: Include the following information:
a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and
frame.
b. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item.
C. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including
name and manufacturer.
d. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
e. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
g. Mounting locations for door hardware.
h. Door and frame sizes and materials.
i. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that
occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter;
authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter;
unauthorized person wants to exit.
j. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
3. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other
work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples,
Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential
to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.
H. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant,
detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and
index each key set to unique door designations.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Door Hardware
MS #:09.0340 Section 08710-2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to
consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity.
3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
4. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including
Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard
units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI
as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting
services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for this Project.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to
Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also
include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's Security Consultant.
Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door
hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required,
and plans for future expansion.
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.
3. Requirements for key control system.
4. Address for delivery of keys.
E. Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to
Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,
and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or
package.
C. Deliver keys to Owner's Representative by registered mail or overnight package service.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Door Hardware
MS #:09.0340 Section 08710-3
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed hardware with floor construction. Cast anchoring
inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 03.
B. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to
confirm that adequate provisions are made
be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to
for locating and installing door hardware to comply
with indicated requirements.
C. Coordinate with aluminum entrance door supplier for door hardware installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
2• Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, except as
follows:
a. Exit Devices: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Manual Closers: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of door hardware.
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six (6) months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive
maintenance, repair or replacement of wom or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and
adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as
those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
Hemming Retail Shell #i
MS #:09.0340
Door Hardware
Section 08710-4
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
Products:
a. Finish: Shall be US26D, unless otherwise noted.
b• Manufacture Standard:
1) Butts: Hager, McKinney, Stanley, Ives*
2) Locksets: Schlage*
3) Cylinders: Schlage Everest*
4) Closers: LCN*
5) Exit Devices: Von Duprin*
6) Trim: Rockwood, Ives*
7) Weatherstrip: Pemko, National Guard*
8) Continuous Hinges: HagerRoton,Ives*
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each
type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section.
Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1• Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one
manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one
manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware
type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with
requirements.
2. ANSUBHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe
hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards.
Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in
this Section.
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A 156.1.
b. Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches: ANSUBHMA A 156.2.
C. Exit Devices: ANSI A 156.3.
d. Door Controls -Closers: ANSI A156.4. 180 degree swing only!
e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSUBHMA A156.5.
f. Architectural Doo T
g.
h.
r nm. AN3IA156.6.
Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.7.
Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI A 156.8.
Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI A 156.13.
Hemming Retail shell o
MS #:09.0340
Door Hardware
Section 08710-5
j. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI A156.15.
k. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI A156.16.
1. Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI A156.17.
M. Materials and Finishes: ANSI A156.18.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using
manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable
ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with
ANSUBHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or
forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for
self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws
except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match
hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as
closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to
the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use
thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work
unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware
securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for
each thm-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, GENERAL
A- Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
I. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
B. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into
wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units.
C. Hinge Weight: As indicated in hardware sets.
D. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
I. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel with stainless-steel pin.
2. Interior Hinges: Steel with steel pin.
3. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Steel with steel pin.
E. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings:
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Door Hardware
Section 08710-6
I . Safety Stud: Designed for stud in one leaf to engage hole in opposing leaf.
2. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging doors.
3. Corners: Square.
F. Fasteners: Comply with the following:
I. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes.
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.
3. Threaded -to -the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors.
2.5 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Hinges shall be a geared continuous hinge utilizing a single gear section for the door leaf and a
separate gear section for the frame side of the door. The door leaf and jamb leaf shall fully
mortised where scheduled, and full surface where scheduled.. Geared hinges are to be certified to
ANSI 156.25, Grade 2 and UL IOC tested and approved for 90 minutes.
2.6 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final
instructions in writing.
i
B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide a new Everest master, grandmaster or
great -grandmaster system. If key pinning charts are required, owner to furnish charts to hardware
supplier.
C. Furnish temporary keyed cores for the construction period, and remove these when directed. The I
construction cores remain property of the supplier and shall be returned to the supplier when they j
are removed. Contractor shall install the permanent cores in the presence of the owner's
representative.
D. Permanent Keys: Secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner's Representative
I
1
1. For estimate: 2 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand -master
keys, 3 control keys. i
I
2.7 PUSH/PULL UNITS f
A. Exposed Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation, thru-
bolted.
2.8 CLOSERS
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices
are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural
Transportations Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Door Hardware
MS #:09.0340 Section 08710-7
1. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements:
a. Interior, Non -fire -rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door.
b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by Authorities Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not
require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 151bf to open door to
minimum required width.
C. Cylinder: Shall be of high strength cast iron construction. All door exterior closers shall be tested
to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing laboratory.
A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles for all
exterior door closers must be provided. Cylinder shall have been manufactured and in the
marketplace for a minimum of 10 years
D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and
anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions
and requirements for opening force.
E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4 Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be
located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body.
Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date -of -manufacture code.
3. Independent lab -tested 10,000,000 cycles. I
4. Thru-bolts at wood doors unless doors are provided with closer blocking. Non -sized,
non -handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms.
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header,
door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware.
6. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 lb., interior doors 5 lb., labeled fire doors 15 ib.
7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve e
for delayed action where scheduled.
8. Extra -duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units.
9. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to
-30 degrees F, furnish data on request.
10. Non -flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
11. Pressure relief values are not allowed.
2.9 EXIT DEVICES/PANIC HARDWARE
A. General features: BHMA Al 56.3, Grade 1.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices
are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural
Transportations Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Door Hardware
MS #:09.0340 Section 08710.8
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not
require more than 151bf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool of special
knowledge for operation.
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to AHJ
for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
I. Independent lab -tested 10,000,000 cycles.
2. Push -through touch pad design. No exposed touch bar fasteners, no exposed cavities
when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus
anti -rattle devices.
3. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
4. Non -handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no
extra parts required to effect change of function.
E. Specific features:
I • Non -Fire Rated Devices: As scheduled in hardware sets.
2. Lever Trim: Vandal resistant, forged brass or bronze escutcheon min .130" thickness.
match lockset lever design.
3. Furnish all exit devices with deadlocking latchbolts.
4. End caps shall be sloped and of heavy-duty metal alloy construction and provide horizontal
adjustment to provide flush alignment with device cover plate. When device end cap is
installed, no raised edges will protrude. End cap shall be cast metal or forged aluminum and
have a minimum thickness of (.250"). Plastic or metal stamping will not be acceptable.
5. Provide all shim kits and filler plates to allow flush mounting of exit devices on all types of
doors used in this project.
2.10 TRIM AND STOPS
A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be
10" high, mop plates to be 5" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door.
g. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware
schedule.
C. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking
adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall stops are preferred. Floor stops are used only where noted in
hardware schedule. Where conditions prohibit the use wall type stops, furnish overhead stops
either surface mounted or concealed as noted in hardware sets.
2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound
seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for
exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
Hemming Retail Shall #1
MS #:09.0340
Door Hardware
Section 08710-9
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and
profile as shown or scheduled.
2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or
Push-pull units if no latch or lock sets).
B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the
Architect's sample.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed
in ANSUBHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional
U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and
other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring
connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series.
1. Surface -Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to
ANSI A250.6.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated, as follows, unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Door Hardware
Section 087 10- 10
I. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install
surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying
with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep
period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds
to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the
door.
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting
operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door
hardware, and electrified door hardware.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Door Hardware
MS #:09.0340 Section 08710-11
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Door Hardware
Section 08710-12
3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
HW SET: 01
3 EA
HINGE
5BB 14.5 X 4.5 NRP
630
IVE
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
98L 996L
I EA
RIM CYLINDER
20-057
626
VON
I EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4041 SHCUSH
626
SCH
1 EA
KICK PLATE
8400 10" X 2" LDW
689
LCN
1 SET
SEALS
700SA
630
IVE
1 EA
DOOR SWEEP
C627A
AL
NGP
1 EA
THRESHOLD
425HD
AL
NGP
AL
NGP
INSTALL WEATHERSTRIPPING
BEFORE INSTALLING CLOSER. DO NOT CUT WEATHERSTRIP
AROUND PARALLEL ARM BRACKET!
HW SET: AL
-01
2 EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
224HD
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
CD9847EO
628
IVE
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
CD9847NL-OP
626
VON
2 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
20-001
626
VON
1 EA
RIM CYLINDER
20-057
626
SCH
2 EA
OFFSET DOOR PULL
8190-0 TB
626
SCH
2 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4041 HEDA
630
IVE
2 EA
OVERHEAD STOP
100S-ADJ
689
LCN
I EA
THRESHOLD
425HD
630
GLY
AL
NGP
1
PERIMETER SEAL AND ASTRAGAL SEAL BY DOOR
B/O
MFG
HW SET: AL -02
I EA
CONTINUOUS HINGE
224HD
1 EA
PANIC HARDWARE
CD98NL-OP
628
IVE
1 EA
MORTISE CYLINDER
20-001
626
VON
1 EA
RIM CYLINDER
20-057
626
SCH
1 EA
OFFSET DOOR PULL
8190-0 TB
626
SCH
1 EA
SURFACE CLOSER
4041 HEDA
630
IVE
I EA
OVERHEAD STOP
100S-ADJ
689
LCN
1 EA
THRESHOLD
425HD
630
GLY
AL
NGP
1
PERIMETER SEAL AND ASTRAGAL SEAL BY DOOR
B/O
MFG
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Door Hardware
MS #:09.0340 Section 08710-13
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 6 Section 'Rough Carpentry " for wood framing and furring.
2. Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation' for insulation and vapor retarders installed in
gypsum board assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board
assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints
including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.
C. Samples: For the following products:
Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12 -inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Hemming Retail shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-1
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
V
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
i
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
c
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G -P Gypsum Corp.
C. National Gypsum Company.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
k
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each t
area and correspond with support system indicated.
1. Standard Gypsum Wallboard:
i
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch
b. Long Edges: Tapered, except square edged at base layers of multi -layer
construction.
C. Location: As indicated. - -
B. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness.
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: As indicated.
C. Water-resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-2
I . Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Location: At wet areas, restrooms, kitchen.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized sheet, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet Galvanized or
aluminum -coated steel sheet or rolled zinc Plastic Paper -faced galvanized steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed
panel edges.
C. L -Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where
indicated.
d. U -Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use
where indicated.
e. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
f. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved
openings and panels.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
C. MM Systems Corporation.
d. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion -resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
i
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-3
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use all purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a. Pecora Corp.; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro -Series SC -170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
b. Pecora Corp.; BA -98.
C. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
C. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
D. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining,
gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce
airborne sound transmission.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-4
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
E. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames,
cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorage's to building
structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings
and that hangers will develop their full strength.
A.
la
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA -216.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings.
E. Attach gypsum panels to studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
F. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-5
G. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor
joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or
provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
I. Isolate perimeter of non -load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except
floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U -bead
edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and
finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations.
I. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications.
K. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.
3.4
A.
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS
Single -Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of board.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly.
B. Multilayer Application on Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and
face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints,
unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on
opposite sides of partitions.
C. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws,
spaced as required to meet fire rating requirements.
D. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws. Spaced as required to meet fire rating requirements.
3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Hemming Retail Shell #1
MS #:09.0340 Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09260-6
B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
fortape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to
ASTM C 840, for locations indicated:
1. Level l: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies
and sound -rated assemblies.
2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners,
and trim flanges where panels are substrate for acoustical tile.
3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to
tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using required equipment, to produce a
uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin
application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture
finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite
these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings to
prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Above -Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings, Architect will
conduct an above -ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not
proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have
been corrected.
Notify Architect seven 7 days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of
Project, will be ready for above -ceiling observation.
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-7
2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board
ceilings:
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.
C. Installation of air -duct systems.
d. Installation of air devices.
e. Installation of mechanical system control -air tubing.
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.
g. Installation of acoustical and thermal insulation and sealants.
END OF SECTION 09260
Hemming Retail Shell #1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
MS #:09.0340 Section 09260-8